~gumara/ubuntu-desktop-course/ubuntu-desktop-course-th-gumara

« back to all changes in this revision

Viewing changes to chapter4/Using_OpenOffice_Applications.xml

Modify Introduction

Show diffs side-by-side

added added

removed removed

Lines of Context:
1
1
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
2
 
<!DOCTYPE chapter PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.2//EN" "http://docbook.org/xml/4.2/docbookx.dtd">
 
2
<!DOCTYPE chapter PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
 
3
"http://docbook.org/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd">
3
4
<chapter>
4
 
        <title>Using OpenOffice Applications</title>
5
 
        <para><emphasis role="strong">Objectives</emphasis></para>
6
 
        <para>In this lesson, you will learn how to:
7
 
                <itemizedlist>
8
 
                        <listitem><para>Perform basic word-processing functions using
9
 
                        OpenOffice.org Writer.</para></listitem>
10
 
                        <listitem><para>Perform basic spreadsheet functions using
11
 
                        OpenOffice.org Calc.</para></listitem>
12
 
                        <listitem><para>Create and view multimedia presentations using
13
 
                        OpenOffice.org Impress.</para></listitem>                               
14
 
                        <listitem><para>Perform basic drawing operations using
15
 
                        OpenOffice.org Draw.</para></listitem>
16
 
                        <listitem><para>Create and edit formulae using OpenOffice.org
17
 
                        Math.</para></listitem>
18
 
                </itemizedlist>
19
 
                <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title></instructornote>
20
 
                <para><emphasis role="italic">It is recommended to cover all 
21
 
                the topics in this lesson. However, if you are running short on time you can omit the following optional topics:</emphasis>
22
 
                <itemizedlist>
23
 
                        <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">OpenOffice.org Draw</emphasis></para></listitem>
24
 
                        <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">OpenOffice.org Math</emphasis></para></listitem>
25
 
                        </itemizedlist>
26
 
                </para>
27
 
                <para><emphasis role="italic">Students, who are familiar with office applications, may want further exposure to these applications. However, ensure to conclude the lesson within the permitted time span.</emphasis></para>
28
 
                </para>
29
 
                <sect1>
30
 
                        <title>Introducing the OpenOffice.org Suite</title>
31
 
                        <para>OpenOffice.org is the default office application suite provided
32
 
                        with Ubuntu. This is a free, open source office software suite that
33
 
                        comprises all the features normally expected in an office suite. It is not
34
 
                        just a collection of separate software programmes; it has been designed as a complete
35
 
                        office package, in which all applications have a similar look and feel and common
36
 
                        tools.</para>
37
 
                        <para>The OpenOffice.org suite is available in more than 30 languages
38
 
                        and can run on many operating systems, including Linux, Microsoft
39
 
                        Windows, Solaris and Mac OS X. It is also compatible with all
40
 
                        other major office suites, including Microsoft Office, which makes it
41
 
                        easy for you to create, open, save and exchange documents with friends and
42
 
                        colleagues in Microsoft Office formats.</para>
43
 
                        <para>Another key feature of the OpenOffice.org suite is that all the
44
 
                        applications save in the OpenDocument format, which is the new international
45
 
                        standard for office documents. This Extensible Markup Language (XML) based
46
 
                        format enables you to access your data from any OpenDocument-compliant
47
 
                        software.</para>
48
 
                        <tip>
49
 
                                <title>Nice to Know:</title>
50
 
                                <para>For more information on the history and development of
51
 
                                OpenOffice.org, please visit <ulink url="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Openoffice.org">http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Openoffice.org</ulink>.</para>
52
 
                        </tip>
53
 
                        <para>The OpenOffice.org software suite includes the following
54
 
                        applications to help you handle your work effectively:
55
 
                                <itemizedlist>
56
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Writer</para></listitem>
57
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Calc</para></listitem>
58
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Impress</para></listitem>
59
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Base</para></listitem>
60
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Draw</para></listitem>
61
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Math</para></listitem>
62
 
                                </itemizedlist>
63
 
                        </para>
64
 
                        <para>To access the OpenOffice.org suite:
65
 
                                <itemizedlist>
66
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis>
67
 
                                        menu, point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
68
 
                                        the OpenOffice.org application you want.</para>
69
 
                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Accessing OpenOffice.org</emphasis></title>
70
 
                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
71
 
                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_001.png" format="PNG"/>
72
 
                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
73
 
                                        </figure>
74
 
                                        </listitem>
75
 
                                </itemizedlist>
76
 
                        </para>
77
 
                        <sect2>
78
 
                                <title>OpenOffice.org Writer</title>
79
 
                                <para>Writer is the word processor of the OpenOffice.org suite. It provides
80
 
                                powerful functions and tools to do anything from writing a small
81
 
                                letter to creating an entire book that contains charts, graphics, images,
82
 
                                tables and an index. Complex desktop publishing tasks, such as creating
83
 
                                multicolumn newsletters and brochures are also on hand.</para>
84
 
                        </sect2>
85
 
                        <sect2>
86
 
                                <title>OpenOffice.org Calc</title>
87
 
                                <para>Calc is a powerful spreadsheet that contains all the tools necessary
88
 
                                to calculate, analyse, summarise and present data in the form of reports
89
 
                                or charts. It has a wide range of advanced functions such as entering complex
90
 
                                formulae, pulling in external data and performing statistical analyses.</para>
91
 
                        </sect2>
92
 
                        <sect2>
93
 
                                <title>OpenOffice.org Impress</title>
94
 
                                <para>Impress is a presentation programme designed to create effective
95
 
                                multimedia presentations. It provides a range of tools to create presentations
96
 
                                with 2D and 3D graphics, clip art, graphics, special effects and
97
 
                                animations.</para>
98
 
                        </sect2>
99
 
                        <sect2>
100
 
                                <title>OpenOffice.org Base</title>
101
 
                                <para>Base is a database programme used to store contact and account information,
102
 
                                create and modify tables, forms, queries and
103
 
                                reports. Accessing data stored in a wide variety of database file formats is also
104
 
                                available. Base will not be covered in detail in this course. For
105
 
                                more information on base, please refer to www.openoffice.org/product/base.html
106
 
                                </para>
107
 
                        </sect2>
108
 
                        <sect2>
109
 
                                <title>OpenOffice.org Draw</title>
110
 
                                <para>Draw is a vector graphics editor that provides tools to create anything
111
 
                                from simple graphics to dynamic 3D illustrations and special effects.</para>
112
 
                        </sect2>
113
 
                        <sect2>
114
 
                                <title>OpenOffice.org Math</title>
115
 
                                <para>You can use Math for creating and editing mathematical equations by using
116
 
                                a graphic user interface or by directly typing the formula into the equation
117
 
                                editor. The formula created in this manner can then be inserted into other
118
 
                                OpenOffice.org programmes, such as Writer, Calc and Impress.</para>
119
 
                                <note><title><emphasis role="strong">Note:</emphasis></title>
120
 
                                <para>Using a new OS and especially a new office application suite is not as
121
 
                                daunting to pick up as you may think. With OpenOffice, most of the operations are very intuitive. 
122
 
                                Think of a new suite as moving to a new house; all your old cutlery, plates
123
 
                                and dishes are in your kitchen cupboards, you just need to get used to the new
124
 
                                kitchen arrangement!</para></note>                                      
125
 
                </sect2>
126
 
                </sect1>
127
 
                <sect1>
128
 
                        <title>Using OpenOffice.org Writer</title>
129
 
                <sect2>
130
 
                                <title>Key Features of OpenOffice.org Writer</title>
131
 
                                <para>You will no doubt be very familiar with most of the features of this
132
 
                                application so only a few of them are included here. The friendly graphical
133
 
                                user interface will assist with the rest.</para>
134
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Writing</emphasis></para>
135
 
                                <para>OpenOffice.org Writer offers a variety of useful features to help you create
136
 
                                basic text documents as well as long and complex or multi-part documents that may
137
 
                                include components such as bibliographies, reference tables and indexes. Some of
138
 
                                these features are:
139
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
140
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Spellchecker:</emphasis> The
141
 
                                                spellchecker feature facilitates error-free writing by enabling you to
142
 
                                                check your entire document, including the header, footer, index entries
143
 
                                                and footnotes, for spelling errors. It even allows you to identify a
144
 
                                                misspelled word from a specific selection of the document, lists
145
 
                                                suggested words for replacing the misspelled word and
146
 
                                                provides you the option to add a new word to the existing user
147
 
                                                dictionary.</para></listitem>
148
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Thesaurus:</emphasis> The
149
 
                                                thesaurus helps you enhance the quality of your writing and make it more
150
 
                                                effective by allowing you to find a more appropriate synonym for a
151
 
                                                selected word.</para></listitem>
152
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Autocorrect:</emphasis>
153
 
                                                Autocorrect is a software function that enables you to reduce your typing
154
 
                                                effort by automatically correcting common spelling and typing errors.
155
 
                                                This feature also allows you to
156
 
                                                automatically apply correct formatting to the text or insert special
157
 
                                                characters by recognizing particular character usage.</para></listitem>
158
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Hyphenation:</emphasis> You can
159
 
                                                use the hyphenation feature to insert hyphens in words that are too long
160
 
                                                to fit at the end of a line. It searches the entire document and suggests
161
 
                                                hyphenation that you can
162
 
                                                either accept or reject.</para></listitem>
163
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Mail merge:</emphasis> The Mail
164
 
                                                merge feature allows you to create multiple personalised form letters,
165
 
                                                labels, envelopes, faxes and e-mail messages by using a form letter
166
 
                                                template and an address database.</para></listitem>
167
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
168
 
                                </para>
169
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Designing and Structuring</emphasis></para>
170
 
                                <para>OpenOffice.org enables you to design and structure your text document by
171
 
                                using an assortment of features, including:
172
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
173
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting window:</emphasis>
174
 
                                                The Style and Formatting window is one of the common features available
175
 
                                                in the OpenOffice. org package that can be used consistently in all the
176
 
                                                applications included in the package. You can use this window to create,
177
 
                                                assign and modify styles for paragraphs, lists, individual characters,
178
 
                                                frames and pages.</para></listitem>
179
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Navigator:</emphasis> Provides you
180
 
                                                with an outline view of the entire document and allows you to quickly
181
 
                                                navigate inside the document. You can also use Navigator to track the
182
 
                                                objects and elements that are already inserted and to insert new elements
183
 
                                                into the document.</para></listitem>
184
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Indexes and Tables:</emphasis>
185
 
                                                Enable you to insert an index, a table of contents or a bibliography
186
 
                                                reference in your text document. You can also customise the inserted
187
 
                                                tables and indexes by defining their structure and appearance.</para>
188
 
                                                </listitem>
189
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
190
 
                                </para>
191
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Desktop Publishing</emphasis></para>
192
 
                                <para>The following features can help you create professionally styled
193
 
                                documents, such as brochures, invitations and newsletters:
194
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
195
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Text Frames:</emphasis> Acts as a container for text and graphics and can be placed anywhere in a document.
196
 
                                                You can also use these frames to apply a multi-column layout to your document and
197
 
                                                render a professional look and style to it.</para></listitem>
198
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Graphics:</emphasis> Allows you to insert a
199
 
                                                graphic object into your text document from a gallery, a file or any other OpenOffice.org application.</para></listitem>
200
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Tables:</emphasis> OpenOffice.org Writer
201
 
                                                also enables you to create or insert a table into a text document.</para></listitem>
202
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
203
 
                                </para>
204
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis></para>
205
 
                                <para>The drawing functions make it easy for you to create many types of drawings and graphics directly
206
 
                                in your text document. You can use the Drawing  bar to add various shapes, lines, text and callouts to a current document.</para>
207
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Drag and Drop</emphasis></para>
208
 
                                <para>This unique feature allows you to drag objects from one location to another in the same document, from one OpenOffice
209
 
                                document to another and from the Gallery to your OpenOffice document.</para>
210
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">The Help Function</emphasis></para>
211
 
                                <para>This is a complete reference for your Writer.</para>
212
 
                        </sect2>
213
 
                        <sect2>
214
 
                                <title>Performing Basic Word-Processing Tasks</title>
215
 
                                <para>You can perform a number of word-processing tasks, such as writing, editing,
216
 
                                formatting, reviewing and printing documents, using OpenOffice.org Writer. The word
217
 
                                processor also allows you to use various templates, apply different styles to your
218
 
                                document, control your page layout and insert, edit and create graphics inside your
219
 
                                text document. Instructions to perform some of the basic word-processing tasks in
220
 
                                Writer are described in the following sections.</para>
221
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Entering and Formatting Text</emphasis></para>
222
 
                                <para>OpenOffice.org Writer is primarily used for writing and formatting text. You can
223
 
                                enter text using your keyboard and then apply a variety of formats to the text, as per
224
 
                                the document's requirements.</para>
225
 
                                <para>You can use the following steps to enter and format text using OpenOffice.org Writer:
226
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
227
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu, point
228
 
                                                to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
229
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Openoffice.org Word Processor</emphasis>. A blank text
230
 
                                                document opens.</para>
231
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Launching Writer</emphasis></title>
232
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
233
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_002.png" format="PNG"/>
234
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
235
 
                                                        </figure>
236
 
                                                </listitem>
237
 
                                                <listitem><para>Depending on what you want to do, you can either create a letter, memo, 
238
 
                                                note or an entire novel from scratch, or you may start with a predefined template or sample that is
239
 
                                                suitable for your requirements.</para>
240
 
                                                        <para>To access the templates and samples, on the <emphasis role="strong">File
241
 
                                                        </emphasis> menu, point to <emphasis role="strong">New</emphasis> and then click
242
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">Templates and Documents</emphasis>. Alternatively, you
243
 
                                                        can press SHIFT+CTRL+N. The <emphasis role="strong">Templates and Documents
244
 
                                                        </emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
245
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Accessing Templates and Documents</emphasis></title>
246
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
247
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_003.png" format="PNG"/>
248
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
249
 
                                                        </figure>
250
 
                                                </listitem>
251
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can view the various categories of available templates in the
252
 
                                                middle column of the Templates and Documents dialogue box. If you want to use a
253
 
                                                template to create your document, you can double-click a category. This will display
254
 
                                                the various templates associated with that category. Select a template of
255
 
                                                your choice and then start working on it.</para>
256
 
                                                <para>However, you may also decide to work with the default blank document. 
257
 
                                                To continue working with the blank document, exit the
258
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Templates and Documents</emphasis> dialogue box by
259
 
                                                clicking <emphasis role="strong">Close</emphasis> in the top-right corner of
260
 
                                                the dialogue box.</para>
261
 
                                                <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Accessing Templates</emphasis></title>
262
 
                                                        <mediaobject><imageobject>
263
 
                                                                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_004.png" format="PNG"/>
264
 
                                                        </imageobject></mediaobject>
265
 
                                                </figure>
266
 
                                                <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
267
 
                                                <para><emphasis role="italic">If students need to know more about using samples and templates, 
268
 
                                                                                                                you can tell them how to use various wizards, available under the File menu, 
269
 
                                                                                                                to create user-defined templates, such as faxes and letters. 
270
 
                                                                                                                These templates can later be used to create further documents.</emphasis> </para></instructornote>
271
 
                                                </listitem>
272
 
                                                <listitem><para>After you have created the document, you can use the various formatting
273
 
                                                features provided in Writer to change the text display or emphasise specific areas in your document.
274
 
                                                You can use the following options available on the <emphasis role="strong">Formatting</emphasis> toolbar to perform some of the most
275
 
                                                common formatting tasks.</para>
276
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Formatting Toolbar</emphasis></title>
277
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
278
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_005.png" format="PNG"/>
279
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
280
 
                                                        </figure>
281
 
                                                </listitem>
282
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can use the<emphasis role="strong">Style and
283
 
                                                Formatting</emphasis> window to perform a complete document makeover.</para>
284
 
                                                        <para>To open the <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> window,
285
 
                                                        on the <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click
286
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis>. The
287
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> window appears.</para>
288
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Accessing Style and Formatting Window</emphasis></title>
289
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
290
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_006.png" format="PNG"/>
291
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
292
 
                                                        </figure>
293
 
                                                </listitem>
294
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can use this window to select and modify the existing style or
295
 
                                                create a new style. Clicking one of the icons below the title bar of the
296
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> window will display a list
297
 
                                                of styles in a particular category, such as a list or a paragraph.</para>
298
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Style and Formatting Icons</emphasis></title>
299
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
300
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_007.png" format="PNG"/>
301
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
302
 
                                                        </figure>
303
 
                                                </listitem>
304
 
                                                <listitem><para>By default, when you open the <emphasis role="strong">Style and
305
 
                                                Formatting</emphasis> window, the <emphasis role="strong">Paragraph</emphasis>
306
 
                                                                <emphasis role="strong">Style</emphasis> icon is selected. All the styles
307
 
                                                                listed in this category are displayed in the <emphasis role="strong">Style
308
 
                                                                and Formatting</emphasis> window. You can start restyling individual parts
309
 
                                                                of the current document by selecting specific parts of the document and
310
 
                                                                applying an existing style by double-clicking that style.</para>
311
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Applying a Style</emphasis></title>
312
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
313
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_008.png" format="PNG"/>
314
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
315
 
                                                        </figure>
316
 
                                                </listitem>
317
 
                                                <listitem><para>However, if you want to modify an existing style, you can simply
318
 
                                                right-click that style and select <emphasis role="strong">Modify.</emphasis> This
319
 
                                                displays a new pop-up window. You can redefine almost all aspects of the selected
320
 
                                                style using the various options available under the different tabs.</para>
321
 
                                                        <para>Modify the specifications of the selected style, and click
322
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the changes.</para>
323
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Modifying a Style</emphasis></title>
324
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
325
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_009.png" format="PNG"/>
326
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
327
 
                                                        </figure>
328
 
                                                </listitem>
329
 
                                                <listitem><para>Double-click the modified style to reflect the changes in the
330
 
                                                selected text.</para>
331
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Applying the Modified Style</emphasis></title>
332
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
333
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_010.png" format="PNG"/>
334
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
335
 
                                                        </figure>
336
 
                                                </listitem>
337
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can go on to customise all other parts of the document in the same way.</para>
338
 
                                                        <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
339
 
                                                                <para><emphasis role="italic">If the students want to know more about the various formatting options available, you can give them the following information:</emphasis></para>
340
 
                                                                <para><emphasis role="italic">OpenOffice.org provides several ways to apply styles. These are:</emphasis>
341
 
                                                                <itemizedlist>
342
 
                                                                        <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">Using the Styles and Formatting
343
 
                                                                        window.</emphasis></para></listitem>
344
 
                                                                        <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">Using Fill Format mode.
345
 
                                                                        </emphasis></para></listitem>
346
 
                                                                        <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">Using the Apply Style list on the
347
 
                                                                        Formatting bar.</emphasis></para></listitem>
348
 
                                                                        <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">Assigning styles to shortcut
349
 
                                                                        keys.</emphasis></para></listitem>
350
 
                                                                        <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">Using AutoFormat.
351
 
                                                                        </emphasis></para></listitem>
352
 
                                                                </itemizedlist>
353
 
                                                                </para>
354
 
                                                                <para><emphasis role="italic">In addition, describe the procedure to create a new style and add it to the Style and Formatting window. </emphasis></para>
355
 
                                                        </instructornote>
356
 
                                                </listitem>
357
 
                                        </orderedlist>
358
 
                                </para>
359
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Inserting Tables</emphasis></para>
360
 
                                <para>To insert a table in a text document, position the cursor where you want the table
361
 
                                to appear and then follow the procedure described below:
362
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
363
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Table</emphasis> menu, point to
364
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> and then click <emphasis role="strong">
365
 
                                                Table.</emphasis> The <emphasis role="strong">Insert Table</emphasis> dialogue box
366
 
                                                opens.</para>
367
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting a Table</emphasis></title>
368
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
369
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_011.png" format="PNG"/>
370
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
371
 
                                                        </figure>
372
 
                                                </listitem>
373
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can use the various options present in the dialogue box to
374
 
                                                specify some of the table properties.</para>
375
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Specifying Table Properties</emphasis></title>
376
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
377
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_012.png" format="PNG"/>
378
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
379
 
                                                        </figure>
380
 
                                                        <tip>
381
 
                                                                <title>Nice to Know:</title>
382
 
                                                                <para>To directly insert a table with the default properties, click the
383
 
                                                                Table icon on the Standard toolbar and select the table size in the graphic
384
 
                                                                that appears. To create the table, click the cell that you want to be on
385
 
                                                                the last row of the last column.</para>
386
 
                                                        </tip>
387
 
                                                </listitem>
388
 
                                                <listitem><para>Specify the table properties and click <emphasis role="strong">OK.
389
 
                                                </emphasis> The table is inserted at the specified location in your text document.
390
 
                                                By default, Writer creates a table as wide as the page margins,
391
 
                                                with all the rows having the same height and all the columns having the same width.
392
 
                                                To adjust the column and rows and customise the table further, right-click the
393
 
                                                table and select <emphasis role="strong">Table</emphasis> from the short-cut menu.
394
 
                                                The <emphasis role="strong">Table Format</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
395
 
                                                        <para>Now you can use this dialogue box to define finer specifications for
396
 
                                                        the table such as alignment, column width, text flow, borders and
397
 
                                                        background.</para>
398
 
                                                        <para>Define the table specifications as per your requirements and preferences,
399
 
                                                        and click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the changes.</para>
400
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Customising the Table Format</emphasis></title>
401
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
402
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_013.png" format="PNG"/>
403
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
404
 
                                                        </figure>
405
 
                                                </listitem>
406
 
                                                <listitem><para>The defined specifications are applied to the table. In case the
407
 
                                                data in one of the table cells needs to be arranged in the form of a table, you
408
 
                                                can create another layer of tables inside the current table. These tables are
409
 
                                                called nested tables. Writer permits you to create as many layers of nested
410
 
                                                tables as you want.</para>
411
 
                                                        <para>To create a nested table, click the cell in which you want the nested
412
 
                                                        table to appear, then follow the procedure for inserting a
413
 
                                                        new table. A nested table appears in the specified cell within the larger
414
 
                                                        table.</para>
415
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Creating a Nested Table</emphasis></title>
416
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
417
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_014.png" format="PNG"/>
418
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
419
 
                                                        </figure>
420
 
                                                </listitem>
421
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can now define the finer specifications of the nested table
422
 
                                                using the Table Format dialogue box and then populate the table with data.</para>
423
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Nested Table</emphasis></title>
424
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
425
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_015.png" format="PNG"/>
426
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
427
 
                                                        </figure>
428
 
                                                </listitem>
429
 
                                        </orderedlist>
430
 
                                </para>
431
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Inserting Images</emphasis></para>
432
 
                                <para>OpenOffice.org allows you to import images of various file formats, including the
433
 
                                most common file types such as JPEG, PNG, BMP and GIF. Images can be inserted from a file,
434
 
                                the OpenOffice.org Gallery, a scanner, the Internet, or a graphics programme.</para>
435
 
                                <para>To insert an image into your text document from a file:
436
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
437
 
                                                <listitem><para>Position the cursor at the location in the document
438
 
                                                where you want the picture to be inserted. On the <emphasis role="strong">Insert
439
 
                                                </emphasis> menu, point to <emphasis role="strong">Picture</emphasis> and then
440
 
                                                click <emphasis role="strong">From File</emphasis>. The <emphasis role="strong">
441
 
                                                Insert Picture</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
442
 
                                                </listitem>
443
 
                                                <listitem><para>To insert the file, navigate to the desired file and select it.
444
 
                                                You can select the <emphasis role="strong">Preview</emphasis> check box at the
445
 
                                                bottom of the <emphasis role="strong">Insert Picture</emphasis> dialogue box
446
 
                                                to preview the selected image in a pane and verify whether you have selected
447
 
                                                the correct image. Click <emphasis role="strong">Open</emphasis> to insert the
448
 
                                                image in your document.</para>
449
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting Image</emphasis></title>
450
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
451
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_016.png" format="PNG"/>
452
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
453
 
                                                        </figure>
454
 
                                                        <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
455
 
                                                        <para><emphasis role="italic">Explain the following:</emphasis></para>
456
 
                                                        <para><emphasis role="italic">Selecting the Link check box creates a link
457
 
                                                        of the selected file inside your text document, instead of saving a copy
458
 
                                                        of the image in your document. As a result, though you'll be able to view
459
 
                                                        the image in the document, when the image is saved, the document will
460
 
                                                        contain only a reference to that image but not the image itself. Linking
461
 
                                                        an image has the following advantages and disadvantages:</emphasis>
462
 
                                                        <itemizedlist>
463
 
                                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">It reduces the size of your document when it is saved because the image is not included in it.  </emphasis></para></listitem>
464
 
                                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">You can edit or modify the image separately without making any changes in the document and can view the modified image the next time you open the document.</emphasis></para></listitem>
465
 
                                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">When you wish to send the document to someone, you need to send both the document and the image otherwise, the receiver will not be able to view the linked image.</emphasis></para></listitem>
466
 
                                                        </itemizedlist></para>
467
 
                                                        </instructornote>
468
 
                                                </listitem>
469
 
                                                <listitem>
470
 
                                                <para>The image is inserted at the specified location in your document. 
471
 
                                                                                If the image does not fit perfectly into your document, you should resize it.</para>
472
 
                                                <para>To resize the image while maintaining its proportions, 
473
 
                                                                                select the image and then press and hold the SHIFT key. 
474
 
                                                                                When you select an image, some square points (known as "handles") appear along its perimeter. 
475
 
                                                                                While holding down the SHIFT key, click and drag one of the handles on the image to 
476
 
                                                                                modify its size.</para>
477
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Resizing the Inserted Image</emphasis></title>
478
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
479
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_017.png" format="PNG"/>
480
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
481
 
                                                        </figure>
482
 
                                                        <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
483
 
                                                                                        <para><emphasis role="italic">Explain the difference between a scaled and an unscaled resize, 
484
 
                                                                                                and emphasise the advantages of the scaled resize performed above.</emphasis></para>
485
 
                                                        </instructornote>
486
 
                                                </listitem>
487
 
                                                <listitem><para>After you have resized the image, you need
488
 
                                                to position the image appropriately in the document. 
489
 
                                                You can arrange and align images using the tools on the
490
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Frame toolbar</emphasis>, which appears below the
491
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Standard toolbar</emphasis> when you select a graphic for
492
 
                                                the first time.</para>
493
 
                                                        <para>Alternatively, you can right-click the image and then select from the
494
 
                                                        available options, such as <emphasis role="strong">Arrange, Wrap</emphasis>
495
 
                                                        or <emphasis role="strong">Anchor,</emphasis> on the short-cut menu.</para>
496
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Positioning the Inserted Image</emphasis></title>
497
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
498
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_018.png" format="PNG"/>
499
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
500
 
                                                        </figure>
501
 
                                                </listitem>
502
 
                                                <listitem><para>After you have selected appropriate positioning options for the
503
 
                                                image, you may obtain a result similar to the following screenshot.</para>
504
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Inserted Image</emphasis></title>
505
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
506
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_019.png" format="PNG"/>
507
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
508
 
                                                        </figure>
509
 
                                                </listitem>
510
 
                                        </orderedlist>
511
 
                                </para>
512
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Printing Documents</emphasis></para>
513
 
                                <para>To print a document:
514
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
515
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
516
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Print</emphasis>. The <emphasis role="strong">Print
517
 
                                                </emphasis> dialogue box opens. You can use this dialogue box to specify
518
 
                                                the printer to be used (in case you have more than one printer installed
519
 
                                                on your system), the pages to be printed, and the number of copies to be
520
 
                                                printed. You can also click the <emphasis role="strong">Properties
521
 
                                                </emphasis> button in the <emphasis role="strong">Print</emphasis> dialogue
522
 
                                                box to define the properties of the printer, such as orientation, the paper
523
 
                                                tray to be used and the paper size to be printed.</para>
524
 
                                                        <para>To define printer options for the current document, click the
525
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">Options</emphasis> button in the
526
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">Print</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
527
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Printing a Document</emphasis></title>
528
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
529
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_020.png" format="PNG"/>
530
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
531
 
                                                        </figure>
532
 
                                                </listitem>
533
 
                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Printer Options</emphasis> dialogue
534
 
                                                box enables you to select specific sections from the current document for
535
 
                                                printing. For example, to save toner or ink, you may not want to print the
536
 
                                                background and the graphics in the document. You can specify these details
537
 
                                                under the <emphasis role="strong">Content</emphasis> section by selecting or
538
 
                                                clearing the appropriate check boxes.</para>
539
 
                                        <para>Similarly, you can define the required printing options
540
 
                                        in the <emphasis role="strong">Pages</emphasis> and <emphasis role="strong"> Notes</emphasis>
541
 
                                        section. After specifying the details, click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis>
542
 
                                        to save your settings.</para>
543
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Defining Printer Options</emphasis></title>
544
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
545
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_021.png" format="PNG"/>
546
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
547
 
                                                        </figure>
548
 
                                                </listitem>
549
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can now start printing the document by clicking
550
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> on the <emphasis role="strong">Print
551
 
                                                </emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
552
 
                                                        <note>
553
 
                                                                <title>Note:</title>
554
 
                                                                <para>Making changes in the Printer Options dialogue box will only apply to the current
555
 
                                                                document and not change your default settings permanently.</para>
556
 
                                                        </note>
557
 
                                                        <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
558
 
                                                                <para><emphasis role="italic">If the students want to know about the procedure to select the default print options, provide them the following information:</emphasis></para>
559
 
                                                                <para><emphasis role="italic">To select the default print options, On the Tools menu, click Options.</emphasis>
560
 
                                                                <itemizedlist>
561
 
                                                                        <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">The OpenOffice.org - Print
562
 
                                                                        dialogue box opens.</emphasis></para></listitem>
563
 
                                                                        <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">In the left navigation
564
 
                                                                        panel, expand OpenOffice.org Writer and then select Print.
565
 
                                                                        </emphasis></para></listitem>
566
 
                                                                        <listitem><para><emphasis role="italic">Select the required options
567
 
                                                                        and click OK to apply the changes to the default print settings.
568
 
                                                                        </emphasis></para></listitem>
569
 
                                                                </itemizedlist></para>
570
 
                                                        </instructornote></listitem>
571
 
                                        </orderedlist>
572
 
                                </para>
573
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Saving Documents</emphasis></para>
574
 
                                <para>You can save your Writer document in the same way as you save any other document.
575
 
                                To save a new text document:
576
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
577
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
578
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Save As</emphasis>. The <emphasis role="strong">
579
 
                                                Save</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
580
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Saving the Document</emphasis></title>
581
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
582
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_022.png" format="PNG"/>
583
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
584
 
                                                        </figure>
585
 
                                                </listitem>
586
 
                                                <listitem><para>Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file,
587
 
                                                enter the file name and click <emphasis role="strong">Save</emphasis> to
588
 
                                                save the file at the desired location.</para>
589
 
                                                        <para>OpenOffice.org also allows you to save your document in
590
 
                                                        a number of other file formats, including Microsoft Word, Rich Text,
591
 
                                                        Star Writer and as an HTML document. This enables you to share your documents
592
 
                                                        with other people who use other office applications, such as Office.</para>
593
 
                                                        <para>If you would like to save your current document as a Word file,
594
 
                                                        select the appropriate type of Word format from the drop-down menu
595
 
                                                        at the bottom of the dialogue box. Then, click <emphasis role="strong">
596
 
                                                        Save</emphasis> to save the file as a Word document.</para>
597
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Saving in Word Format</emphasis></title>
598
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
599
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_023.png" format="PNG"/>
600
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
601
 
                                                        </figure>
602
 
                                                </listitem>
603
 
                                        </orderedlist>
604
 
                                </para>
605
 
                        </sect2>
606
 
                </sect1>
607
 
                <sect1>
608
 
                        <title>Using OpenOffice.org Calc</title>
609
 
                        <para>Calc is the spreadsheet component of the OpenOffice.org office
610
 
                        software suite. The comprehensive range of advanced functions included in Calc helps
611
 
                        professionals accomplish complex tasks. At the same time, Calc is user-friendly,
612
 
                        which makes it easier for new users. This topic will familiarise you with its
613
 
                        key features and teach you how to perform some basic spreadsheet functions.</para>
614
 
                        <para>Similar to all other applications in the OpenOffice.org suite, Calc allows
615
 
                        you to save spreadsheets in OASIS OpenDocument (ODF) format. This XML-based format
616
 
                        enables you to access your spreadsheets from any OpenDocument-compliant software.
617
 
                        In addition, Calc allows you to save spreadsheets directly as Portable Document
618
 
                        Format (PDF) files without using any additional, expensive software.</para>
619
 
                        <sect2>
620
 
                                <title>Key Features of OpenOffice.org Calc</title>
621
 
                                <para>Calc is a fully featured office application that includes all the advanced
622
 
                                analysis, charting and decision-making features that you expect from a high-end
623
 
                                spreadsheet. Some of the key features of OpenOffice.org Calc are:
624
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
625
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Calculation:</emphasis>
626
 
                                                OpenOffice.org Calc provides you with over 300 functions for financial,
627
 
                                                logical, statistical, mathematical and banking operations. This enables
628
 
                                                you to create formulae to perform complex calculations on your data. In
629
 
                                                addition, Calc provides you with Function wizard that guides you
630
 
                                                interactively through the creation of formulae.</para>
631
 
                                                <para>Another feature of OpenOffice.org Calc is that it allows
632
 
                                                you to create natural language formulae using words such as sales - costs.
633
 
                                                </para></listitem>
634
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Scenario Manager:</emphasis> Allows you perform
635
 
                                                'what-if' analyses and view the result of changes made to any factor of the calculation.
636
 
                                                For example, when performing a loan calculation, you can change the period of the loan and can view
637
 
                                                the resulting calculations for the loan-repayment amount or the interest
638
 
                                                rate.</para></listitem>
639
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Data Pilot:</emphasis> Enables you to compare, combine and
640
 
                                                arrange large amounts of data. It helps you pull in raw data from corporate databases, cross-tabulate,
641
 
                                                summarise and convert the data into meaningful information. You can use
642
 
                                                Data Pilot to create interactive tables, which allows the data to be
643
 
                                                frequently arranged, rearranged or summarised according to different
644
 
                                                points of view.</para></listitem>
645
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Dynamic Charts:</emphasis> As the name suggests, these charts
646
 
                                                update automatically as the data in the spreadsheet changes.</para></listitem>
647
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Opening and Saving Microsoft Files:
648
 
                                                </emphasis> Calc allows you to use your old Microsoft spreadsheets and save your work in Microsoft Excel or
649
 
                                                a variety of other formats. This facilitates the easy sharing of data with others using Microsoft or
650
 
                                                similar applications.</para></listitem>
651
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
652
 
                                </para>
653
 
                        </sect2>
654
 
                        <sect2>
655
 
                                <title>Performing Basic Spreadsheet Tasks</title>
656
 
                                <para>Similar to any other spreadsheet application, Calc is used to process
657
 
                                numerical information or text in tabular form. It is primarily used for
658
 
                                tabulating numerical figures. It also allows you to sort and manipulate data,
659
 
                                apply arithmetic, mathematic and statistical functions to data sets and
660
 
                                represent the datasets in charts or graphical forms. The following sections
661
 
                                describe the instructions to perform some basic spreadsheet tasks in Calc.</para>
662
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Formatting Tables and Cells</emphasis></para>
663
 
                                <para>To format tables and cells in a Calc spreadsheet:
664
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
665
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis>
666
 
                                                menu, point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
667
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">OpenOffice.org Spreadsheet</emphasis> to open a
668
 
                                                Calc spreadsheet. A new Calc window opens.</para>
669
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Launching Calc</emphasis></title>
670
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
671
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_024.png" format="PNG"/>
672
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
673
 
                                                        </figure>
674
 
                                                </listitem>
675
 
                                                <listitem><para>Some of the key components of the main Calc window are
676
 
                                                described below:</para>
677
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Calc Window</emphasis></title>
678
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
679
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_025.png" format="PNG"/>
680
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
681
 
                                                        </figure>
682
 
                                                        <itemizedlist>
683
 
                                                                <listitem><para>The Name box contains the cell and the row
684
 
                                                                number, called the cell reference, of the current or active
685
 
                                                                cell.</para></listitem>
686
 
                                                                <listitem><para>The active cell indicates the selected cell
687
 
                                                                currently in use.</para></listitem>
688
 
                                                                <listitem><para>The Function wizard opens the Function Wizard
689
 
                                                                dialogue box.</para></listitem>
690
 
                                                                <listitem><para>The Sum button allows you to calculate the sum
691
 
                                                                of the numbers in the cells that are above the current cell.
692
 
                                                                </para></listitem>
693
 
                                                                <listitem><para>Clicking the Function button inserts an equals
694
 
                                                                sign into the current cell as well as in the input line,
695
 
                                                                making it ready to accept a formula.</para></listitem>
696
 
                                                                <listitem><para>The sheet tabs at the bottom of the sheet
697
 
                                                                indicate the number of worksheets present in the current spreadsheet.
698
 
                                                                By default, a new spreadsheet includes three worksheets.
699
 
                                                                </para></listitem>
700
 
                                                        </itemizedlist>
701
 
                                                </listitem>
702
 
                                                <listitem><para>After you have entered the required data in the spreadsheet,
703
 
                                                you can apply different formatting styles to it by selecting from the wide
704
 
                                                range of options available in Calc. To apply desired formatting to a
705
 
                                                selected range of cells, on the <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis>
706
 
                                                menu, click <emphasis role="strong">Cells.</emphasis> The
707
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Format Cells</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
708
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Formatting Cells</emphasis></title>
709
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
710
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_026.png" format="PNG"/>
711
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
712
 
                                                        </figure>
713
 
                                                </listitem>
714
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can use the various options available under the
715
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Font, Font Effects</emphasis> and
716
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Alignment</emphasis> tabs to specify various
717
 
                                                formatting attributes for the selected text. Similarly, for assigning formatting
718
 
                                                attributes to numbers, you can select from a number of pre-defined formats
719
 
                                                available on the <emphasis role="strong">Numbers</emphasis> tab page or define
720
 
                                                a new one based on your preferences.</para>
721
 
                                                        <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Format Cells</emphasis> dialogue box also
722
 
                                                        provides you with options to add smart borders and vibrant backgrounds to
723
 
                                                        your spreadsheet. It also allows you to select a background colour, from
724
 
                                                        a spectrum of colours, for your otherwise bland and dull spreadsheet.</para>
725
 
                                                        <para>Define the specifications and click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis>
726
 
                                                        to apply the formatting effects.</para>
727
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Defining Formatting Attributes</emphasis></title>
728
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
729
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_027.png" format="PNG"/>
730
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
731
 
                                                        </figure>
732
 
                                                </listitem>
733
 
                                                <listitem><para>After you have selected formatting attributes for the selected
734
 
                                                cell range, you may get a result similar to this one.</para>
735
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Formatted Spreadsheet</emphasis></title>
736
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
737
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_028.png" format="PNG"/>
738
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
739
 
                                                        </figure>
740
 
                                                </listitem>
741
 
                                                <listitem><para>Calc provides you with another useful feature, called
742
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Autoformat,</emphasis> which enables you to
743
 
                                                create attractive and professional table designs without undergoing
744
 
                                                the time-consuming process of selecting cell groups and assigning
745
 
                                                different formats to them. The Autoformat feature allows you to quickly
746
 
                                                apply preset formats to an entire sheet or a selected cell range. To
747
 
                                                apply Autoformat to a sheet or selected cell range, on the
748
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click
749
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Autoformat</emphasis>.</para>
750
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Using Autoformat</emphasis></title>
751
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
752
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_029.png" format="PNG"/>
753
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
754
 
                                                        </figure>
755
 
                                                </listitem>
756
 
                                                <listitem><para>This displays the AutoFormat dialogue box. To assign a
757
 
                                                pre-set format to the selected cells, select one from the
758
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> list and then click
759
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the selected format to
760
 
                                                the selection.</para>
761
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a Format</emphasis></title>
762
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
763
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_030.png" format="PNG"/>
764
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
765
 
                                                        </figure>
766
 
                                                </listitem>
767
 
                                                <listitem><para>The format of your choice is immediately applied to the
768
 
                                                selection, and you get an attractive and fully formatted table with very
769
 
                                                little effort.</para>
770
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Formatted Table</emphasis></title>
771
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
772
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_031.png" format="PNG"/>
773
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
774
 
                                                        </figure>
775
 
                                                </listitem>
776
 
                                        </orderedlist>
777
 
                                </para>
778
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Entering Values and Formulas</emphasis></para>
779
 
                                <para>A formula is a spreadsheet function, complete with arguments, entered in
780
 
                                a cell. All formulae begin with an equal sign and may contain number, text and,
781
 
                                in some cases, other data such as format details. The formulae may also contain
782
 
                                arithmetic operators, logic operators or function starts. </para>
783
 
                                <para>Table 5.1 lists some examples of OpenOffice.org formulae:
784
 
                                        <table>
785
 
                                                <title>Calc Formulae</title>
786
 
                                                <tgroup cols="2">
787
 
                                                        <colspec colname="col1" align="left"/>
788
 
                                                        <colspec colname="col2" align="left"/>
789
 
                                                        <tbody>
790
 
                                                                <row>
791
 
                                                                        <entry><para><emphasis role="strong">Formulae</emphasis></para></entry>
792
 
                                                                        <entry><para><emphasis role="strong">Description</emphasis></para></entry>
793
 
                                                                </row>
794
 
                                                                <row>
795
 
                                                                        <entry><para><emphasis role="strong">=SUM(A1:A11)</emphasis></para></entry>
796
 
                                                                        <entry><para>Calculates the sum of the cells A1:A11</para></entry>
797
 
                                                                </row>
798
 
                                                                <row>
799
 
                                                                        <entry><para><emphasis role="strong">=EFFECTIVE(5%;12)</emphasis></para></entry>
800
 
                                                                        <entry><para>Calculates the effective interest for 5% annual
801
 
                                                                        nominal interest with 12 payments a year</para></entry>
802
 
                                                                </row>
803
 
                                                                <row>
804
 
                                                                        <entry><para><emphasis role="strong">=B1*B2</emphasis></para></entry>
805
 
                                                                        <entry><para>Displays the result of the multiplication of B1 and B2</para></entry>
806
 
                                                                </row>
807
 
                                                                <row>
808
 
                                                                        <entry><para><emphasis role="strong">=C4-SUM(C10:C14)</emphasis></para></entry>
809
 
                                                                        <entry><para>Calculates C4 minus the sum of cells C10 to C14</para></entry>
810
 
                                                                </row>
811
 
                                                        </tbody>
812
 
                                                </tgroup>
813
 
                                        </table>
814
 
                                </para>
815
 
                                <para>The quickest way to enter a formula is to type the formula either in
816
 
                                the cell where you want the result to display or in the Input Line on the
817
 
                                Formula bar. You can also use the Function
818
 
                                wizard, which helps you interactively create formulae.</para>
819
 
                                <para>To enter a formula using the Function wizard:
820
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
821
 
                                                <listitem><para>In your spreadsheet, select the cell where you want
822
 
                                                the formula to be inserted. To allow the Function wizard to guide you
823
 
                                                through the creation and application of a formula, on the
824
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Formula bar</emphasis>, click
825
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis>. This opens the
826
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
827
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Launching Function Wizard</emphasis></title>
828
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
829
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_032.png" format="PNG"/>
830
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
831
 
                                                        </figure>
832
 
                                                </listitem>
833
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can see the entire range of functions listed in the
834
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Functions</emphasis> list box. You can also
835
 
                                                select one category from the Category drop-down list to display the
836
 
                                                functions listed under that category. Find the desired function from the
837
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Functions</emphasis> list, and click to select it.
838
 
                                                You notice that the <emphasis role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis>
839
 
                                                dialogue box provides you some information about the selected function
840
 
                                                to guide you through your selection. After selecting the function, click
841
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Next</emphasis> to proceed with the task of
842
 
                                                entering a formula.</para>
843
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a Function</emphasis></title>
844
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
845
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_033.png" format="PNG"/>
846
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
847
 
                                                        </figure>
848
 
                                                </listitem>
849
 
                                                <listitem><para>Now, you need to specify the numbers to which you
850
 
                                                want to apply the formula. To select the numbers, you need to go back to
851
 
                                                the worksheet.</para>
852
 
                                                        <para>Click the <emphasis role="strong">Shrink</emphasis> button to
853
 
                                                        shrink this dialogue box and return to the worksheet.</para>
854
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Shrinking the Function Wizard Dialogue Box</emphasis></title>
855
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
856
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_034.png" format="PNG"/>
857
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
858
 
                                                        </figure>
859
 
                                                </listitem>
860
 
                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis>
861
 
                                                dialogue box shrinks to allow you to view the worksheet. To select the
862
 
                                                cell range, hold down the <emphasis role="strong">SHIFT</emphasis> key
863
 
                                                and use the mouse to select the cell range containing the desired
864
 
                                                numbers.</para>
865
 
                                                        <para>After selecting the cells, you can go back to the Function
866
 
                                                        wizard by clicking the <emphasis role="strong">Maximize</emphasis>
867
 
                                                        button.</para>
868
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting the Cell Range</emphasis></title>
869
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
870
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_035.png" format="PNG"/>
871
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
872
 
                                                        </figure>
873
 
                                                </listitem>
874
 
                                                <listitem><para>The cell reference for the selected cell range
875
 
                                                automatically appears in the <emphasis role="strong">number 1</emphasis>
876
 
                                                box and the applied formula, complete with arguments, appears in the
877
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Formula</emphasis> box at the bottom of the dialogue
878
 
                                                box. To complete the task of entering a formula, click
879
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis>.</para>
880
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Applying the Formula</emphasis></title>
881
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
882
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_036.png" format="PNG"/>
883
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
884
 
                                                        </figure>
885
 
                                                </listitem>
886
 
                                                <listitem><para>The solution appears in the cell where you had applied the
887
 
                                                formula.</para>
888
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Final Output</emphasis></title>
889
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
890
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_037.png" format="PNG"/>
891
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
892
 
                                                        </figure>
893
 
                                                </listitem>
894
 
                                        </orderedlist>
895
 
                                </para>
896
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Inserting Charts</emphasis></para>
897
 
                                <para>You can present your data in the form of charts or graphs to compare your data
898
 
                                series visually and view trends in the data. Calc offers you a number of ways to
899
 
                                represent spreadsheet data graphically.</para>
900
 
                                <para>To insert a chart in your spreadsheet:
901
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
902
 
                                                <listitem><para>Open a spreadsheet containing data and row and column headings,
903
 
                                                and select the data to be included in the chart. Then, on the
904
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, select
905
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Chart</emphasis>. The
906
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Chart Wizard</emphasis> dialogue box appears.</para>
907
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Launching the Chart Wizard</emphasis></title>
908
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
909
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_038.png" format="PNG"/>
910
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
911
 
                                                        </figure>
912
 
                                                <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
913
 
                                                        <para><emphasis role="italic">Advise students about the alternate way to insert a chart using the Insert Chart icon from the Standard toolbar.
914
 
                                                        </emphasis></para></instructornote></listitem>
915
 
                                                <listitem>
916
 
                                                                                <para>On the first page of the <emphasis role="strong">Chart wizard</emphasis>, 
917
 
                                                                                                                you can select the chart type and preview the chart output. 
918
 
                                                                                                                Calc allows you to select from a wide range of 2D and 3D charts.  
919
 
                                                                                                                You may decide to follow the rest of the instructions of the Chart Wizard by clicking 
920
 
                                                                                                                <emphasis role="strong">Next</emphasis> or you can click 
921
 
                                                                                                                <emphasis role="strong">Finish</emphasis> to insert a chart in your document.</para>
922
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting the Chart Type</emphasis></title>
923
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
924
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_039.png" format="PNG"/>
925
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
926
 
                                                        </figure>
927
 
                                                </listitem>
928
 
                                                <listitem><para>The chart is inserted at the specified location in your
929
 
                                                spreadsheet. You can now move and resize the chart and edit it further to
930
 
                                                suit your requirements.</para>
931
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Inserted Chart</emphasis></title>
932
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
933
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_040.png" format="PNG"/>
934
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
935
 
                                                        </figure>
936
 
                                                </listitem>
937
 
                                        </orderedlist>
938
 
                                </para>
939
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Exporting Spreadsheets to PDF</emphasis></para>
940
 
                                <para>Like the other OpenOffice.org applications, you can export your spreadsheets from Calc as PDF files. 
941
 
                                With Openoffice.org, you need not use
942
 
                                any additional third-party software to convert your document into PDF format.</para>
943
 
                                <para>To export your spreadsheet as a PDF:
944
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
945
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu,
946
 
                                                click <emphasis role="strong">Export as PDF</emphasis>.
947
 
                                                The<emphasis role="strong">Export</emphasis> dialogue box appears.</para>
948
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Exporting Spreadsheet as PDF</emphasis></title>
949
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
950
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_041.png" format="PNG"/>
951
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
952
 
                                                        </figure>
953
 
                                                </listitem>
954
 
                                                <listitem><para>The four tabbed pages in this dialogue box allow you to define
955
 
                                                options, such as the pages to be included in the PDF, the type of compression
956
 
                                                to be used and the level of security to be assigned to the file. After defining
957
 
                                                these specifications, click <emphasis role="strong">Export</emphasis> to
958
 
                                                continue.</para>
959
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Defining PDF Options</emphasis></title>
960
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
961
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_042.png" format="PNG"/>
962
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
963
 
                                                        </figure>
964
 
                                                </listitem>
965
 
                                                <listitem><para>Provide a file name for your spreadsheet and navigate to the
966
 
                                                directory where you want to save it. Click <emphasis role="strong">Save
967
 
                                                </emphasis>     to export the spreadsheet as a PDF file.</para>
968
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Saving as PDF</emphasis></title>
969
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
970
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_043.png" format="PNG"/>
971
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
972
 
                                                        </figure>
973
 
                                                        <tip>
974
 
                                                                <title>Nice to Know:</title>
975
 
                                                                <para>To discover an Easter Egg tucked away in Calc, click within
976
 
                                                                any of the cells of your spreadsheet, type <emphasis role="strong">=
977
 
                                                                GAME("StarWars")</emphasis> and start playing right away.
978
 
                                                                </para>
979
 
                                                        </tip>
980
 
                                                </listitem>
981
 
                                                <listitem><para>Your spreadsheet is now displayed as a PDF file.</para>
982
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The PDF file</emphasis></title>
983
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
984
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_044.png" format="PNG"/>
985
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
986
 
                                                        </figure>
987
 
                                                </listitem>
988
 
                                        </orderedlist>
989
 
                                </para>
990
 
                        </sect2>
991
 
                </sect1>
992
 
                <sect1>
993
 
                        <title>Using OpenOffice.org Impress</title>
994
 
                        <para>Impress is a fully featured presentation tool of the OpenOffice.org office
995
 
                        software suite. It enables you to create effective multimedia presentations by
996
 
                        creating 2D and 3D clip art and images. It also allows you to create special
997
 
                        effects and animations by using high-impact drawing tools.</para>
998
 
                        <para>OpenOffice.org Impress is similar to Microsoft PowerPoint in its
999
 
                        functionality. In addition to making it easy for you to create PDF files from
1000
 
                        presentations, Impress lets you export the presentations into ShockWave Flash
1001
 
                        (SWF) files. This enables you to run the output on any computer that has a Flash
1002
 
                        player installed.</para>
1003
 
                        <sect2>
1004
 
                                <title>Key Features of OpenOffice.org Impress</title>
1005
 
                                <para>Some of the many useful features of Impress are:</para>
1006
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Creating Vector Graphics:</emphasis> Impress
1007
 
                                comes bundled with various drawing tools that allow you to create vector
1008
 
                                graphics from within the application. You can also export vector graphics
1009
 
                                to bitmap pictures and, inversely, convert bitmap pictures into vector
1010
 
                                graphics.</para>
1011
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Creating Slides:</emphasis> Choose from
1012
 
                                ready-to-use templates or use the drawing and diagram tools to jazz up your slides.
1013
 
                                Master view adds the elements that you want to appear on all slides of your presentation.</para>
1014
 
                                <para>Further, Impress users have the option to install the Open ClipArt
1015
 
                                library, which contains a huge selection of images for free use.</para>
1016
 
                                <para>Animations and effects help add spice to your presentations. You can
1017
 
                                render stunning 2D and 3D effects to your text using Fontwork, which lets
1018
 
                                you create life-like 3D images easily.</para>
1019
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Publishing Presentations:</emphasis> Impress allows you to 
1020
 
                                                                publish presentations as handouts, export them into PDF files, 
1021
 
                                                                convert them into SWF files and publish them as HTML
1022
 
                                documents. This enables you to access your presentation from a variety of
1023
 
                                platforms.</para>
1024
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Saving Presentation in Other Formats:</emphasis>
1025
 
                                Similar to other OpenOffice.Org applications, Impress saves your work in the
1026
 
                                international OpenDocument format. It also allows you to save your work in
1027
 
                                other formats such as PowerPoint.</para>
1028
 
                        </sect2>
1029
 
                        <sect2>
1030
 
                                <title>Creating Multi-Media Presentations</title>
1031
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Creating, Viewing and Printing a Presentation
1032
 
                                </emphasis></para>
1033
 
                                <para>To create and view presentations using OpenOffice.org Impress:
1034
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1035
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis>
1036
 
                                                menu, point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
1037
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">OpenOffice.org Presentation</emphasis>.</para>
1038
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Launching Impress</emphasis></title>
1039
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1040
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_045.png" format="PNG"/>
1041
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1042
 
                                                        </figure>
1043
 
                                                </listitem>
1044
 
                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Presentation Wizard</emphasis>
1045
 
                                                dialogue box appears. The <emphasis role="strong">Presentation
1046
 
                                                wizard</emphasis> allows you to define the basic structure of a presentation
1047
 
                                                in three brief steps. You can either continue defining the specifications
1048
 
                                                as guided by the Presentation Wizard or immediately create a new blank
1049
 
                                                presentation by clicking <emphasis role="strong">Create</emphasis>.</para>
1050
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Using the Presentation Wizard</emphasis></title>
1051
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1052
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_046.png" format="PNG"/>
1053
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1054
 
                                                        </figure>
1055
 
                                                        <tip>
1056
 
                                                                <title>Nice to Know:</title>
1057
 
                                                                <para>To be able to preview the slide template, slide design and
1058
 
                                                                slide transition effects, leave the Preview check box selected.</para>
1059
 
                                                        </tip>
1060
 
                                                </listitem>
1061
 
                                                <listitem><para>This figure shows the main Impress window with an empty
1062
 
                                                presentation. From the <emphasis role="strong">Task</emphasis> pane on the
1063
 
                                                left, you can select a layout for your current slide.</para>
1064
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Impress Window</emphasis></title>
1065
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1066
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_047.png" format="PNG"/>
1067
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1068
 
                                                        </figure>
1069
 
                                                </listitem>
1070
 
                                                <listitem><para>Enter the required text in the provided text boxes to create
1071
 
                                                the first slide. To make your presentation more attractive and professional looking,
1072
 
                                                you can either change the background and format the font size and colour for each 
1073
 
                                                slide or simply select a pre-defined template from the <emphasis role="strong">Master Pages</emphasis> panel.</para>
1074
 
                                                        <para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Master Pages</emphasis> to open the
1075
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">Master Pages</emphasis> panel.</para>
1076
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Opening the Master Pages Panel</emphasis></title>
1077
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1078
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_048.png" format="PNG"/>
1079
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1080
 
                                                        </figure>
1081
 
                                                </listitem>
1082
 
                                                <listitem><para>A number of templates are available on the
1083
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Master Pages</emphasis> panel. Select the template
1084
 
                                                of your choice to apply a whole new look to your presentation. You can enhance
1085
 
                                                the look of the presentation further by adding various elements, such as
1086
 
                                                objects, pictures and animated images, from the <emphasis role="strong">
1087
 
                                                Insert</emphasis> menu. Alternatively, you can start adding new slides to
1088
 
                                                the presentation.</para>
1089
 
                                                        <para>You can add a new slide by clicking the <emphasis role="strong">Slide
1090
 
                                                        </emphasis> button on the <emphasis role="strong">Standard toolbar</emphasis>.
1091
 
                                                        Alternatively, click <emphasis role="strong">Slide</emphasis> on the
1092
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu.</para>
1093
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a Slide Template</emphasis></title>
1094
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1095
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_049.png" format="PNG"/>
1096
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1097
 
                                                        </figure>
1098
 
                                                </listitem>
1099
 
                                                <listitem><para>The inserted slide is also formatted as the first slide because
1100
 
                                                that is the layout you selected last. According to the requirements of your
1101
 
                                                presentation, you can select a new format from the <emphasis role="strong">
1102
 
                                                Layout</emphasis> pane. The new layout has two columns, one for text and the
1103
 
                                                other for images. This allows you to display text along with an associated
1104
 
                                                image on the same slide. Enter the textual content in the provided text boxes,
1105
 
                                                then double-click the house icon to insert a graphic in the provided
1106
 
                                                placeholder.</para>
1107
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a Slide Layout</emphasis></title>
1108
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1109
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_050.png" format="PNG"/>
1110
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1111
 
                                                        </figure>
1112
 
                                                </listitem>
1113
 
                                                <listitem><para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Insert Picture</emphasis>
1114
 
                                                dialogue box, select the desired image and click <emphasis role="strong">
1115
 
                                                Open</emphasis> to insert it into your slide.</para>
1116
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting Picture in a Slide</emphasis></title>
1117
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1118
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_051.png" format="PNG"/>
1119
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1120
 
                                                        </figure>
1121
 
                                                </listitem>
1122
 
                                                <listitem><para>Notice that the inserted picture is automatically resized
1123
 
                                                to fit into the provided space. You can also insert an image by
1124
 
                                                selecting <emphasis role="strong">Picture</emphasis> from the
1125
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu. A picture inserted in this
1126
 
                                                way is not automatically resized, but you can move and resize it as
1127
 
                                                needed. You can insert new slides in a similar fashion.</para>
1128
 
                                                        <para>Now, you are ready to display your presentation as a slide show.
1129
 
                                                        To configure the basic slide show setting, select <emphasis role="strong">
1130
 
                                                        Slide Show Settings</emphasis> from the <emphasis role="strong">Slide
1131
 
                                                        Show</emphasis> menu.</para>
1132
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Setting up a Slide Show</emphasis></title>
1133
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1134
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_052.png" format="PNG"/>
1135
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1136
 
                                                        </figure>
1137
 
                                                </listitem>
1138
 
                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> dialogue
1139
 
                                                box helps you define the basic settings for your slide show. In the
1140
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Range</emphasis> section, you can specify the
1141
 
                                                slides to be included in the presentation and their order of display. In
1142
 
                                                the <emphasis role="strong">Type</emphasis> section, you can define how to
1143
 
                                                display the slides. Similarly, the <emphasis role="strong">Options</emphasis>
1144
 
                                                section allows you to define various other settings for your
1145
 
                                                presentation.</para>
1146
 
                                                        <para>After selecting the desired options, click <emphasis role="strong">
1147
 
                                                        OK</emphasis> to apply the settings.</para>
1148
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Configuring the Slide Show Settings</emphasis></title>
1149
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1150
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_053.png" format="PNG"/>
1151
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1152
 
                                                        </figure>
1153
 
                                                </listitem>
1154
 
                                                <listitem><para>To start the slide show select <emphasis role="strong">Slide
1155
 
                                                Show</emphasis> from the <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> menu or
1156
 
                                                press <emphasis role="strong">F5</emphasis>.</para>
1157
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Starting the Slide Show</emphasis></title>
1158
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1159
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_054.png" format="PNG"/>
1160
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1161
 
                                                        </figure>
1162
 
                                                </listitem>
1163
 
                                                <listitem><para>The presentation can be viewed as a running slide show. When
1164
 
                                                you reach the last slide of the presentation, you are prompted to exit the
1165
 
                                                presentation by clicking once. However, you can exit a slide show at any
1166
 
                                                point of time by pressing <emphasis role="strong">ESC</emphasis>.
1167
 
                                                </para></listitem>
1168
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can choose to print your slides with notes,
1169
 
                                                as an outline, with page numbers, with date and time and so on. To do this, select <emphasis role="strong">Print</emphasis> from
1170
 
                                                the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu.</para>
1171
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Printing the Presentation</emphasis></title>
1172
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1173
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_055.png" format="PNG"/>
1174
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1175
 
                                                        </figure>
1176
 
                                                </listitem>
1177
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can use the <emphasis role="strong">Print</emphasis>
1178
 
                                                dialogue box to further define printer settings or accept the default
1179
 
                                                settings, and click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to start
1180
 
                                                printing your presentation.</para>
1181
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Defining Printer Settings</emphasis></title>
1182
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1183
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_056.png" format="PNG"/>
1184
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1185
 
                                                        </figure>
1186
 
                                                </listitem>
1187
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1188
 
                                </para>
1189
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Animating Objects and 3D Objects</emphasis></para>
1190
 
                                <para>To create a presentation with 3D effects and animations:
1191
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1192
 
                                                <listitem><para>Open a new presentation in which you want to use 3D
1193
 
                                                graphics and animations, and select a suitable template from the
1194
 
                                                Master pages panel. Now, you can start adding elements to your
1195
 
                                                presentation to spice it up. Begin with placing the title of your
1196
 
                                                presentation on the first slide.</para>
1197
 
                                                <para>To create an eye-catching display for the title text, you can
1198
 
                                                use one of the many wonderful text tools available in Impress.
1199
 
                                                One of these is Fontwork, which enables you to create special 3D effects
1200
 
                                                to your text. To start using Fontwork, on the <emphasis role="strong">
1201
 
                                                Drawing</emphasis> toolbar, click the <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork
1202
 
                                                Gallery</emphasis> button. The <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork
1203
 
                                                Gallery</emphasis> window appears.</para>
1204
 
                                                <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Opening Fontwork Gallery</emphasis></title>
1205
 
                                                        <mediaobject><imageobject>
1206
 
                                                                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_057.png" format="PNG"/>
1207
 
                                                        </imageobject></mediaobject>
1208
 
                                                </figure>
1209
 
                                                </listitem>
1210
 
                                                <listitem><para>Select the style in which you want the title text to
1211
 
                                                be displayed, and click <emphasis role="strong">OK.</emphasis></para>
1212
 
                                                <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a Fontwork Style</emphasis></title>
1213
 
                                                        <mediaobject><imageobject>
1214
 
                                                                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_058.png" format="PNG"/>
1215
 
                                                        </imageobject></mediaobject>
1216
 
                                                </figure>
1217
 
                                                </listitem>
1218
 
                                                <listitem><para>The text <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork,</emphasis>
1219
 
                                                in the selected style, appears on the slide as an object. To display the
1220
 
                                                title text in place of the <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork</emphasis>
1221
 
                                                object, double-click the object and type the title text in place of the
1222
 
                                                black Fontwork that appears over the object. Click outside the object's
1223
 
                                                selected area to exit the <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork</emphasis> edit
1224
 
                                                mode.</para>
1225
 
                                                <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Editing the Fontwork Object</emphasis></title>
1226
 
                                                        <mediaobject><imageobject>
1227
 
                                                                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_059.png" format="PNG"/>
1228
 
                                                        </imageobject></mediaobject>
1229
 
                                                </figure>
1230
 
                                                </listitem>
1231
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can go ahead and do the same on the other slides too by inserting 3D
1232
 
                                                images and animating them.</para>
1233
 
                                                <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The 3D Text</emphasis></title>
1234
 
                                                        <mediaobject><imageobject>
1235
 
                                                                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_060.png" format="PNG"/>
1236
 
                                                        </imageobject></mediaobject>
1237
 
                                                </figure>
1238
 
                                                </listitem>
1239
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can insert 3D graphic objects in your presentation from
1240
 
                                                the 3D-Objects toolbar. By default, this toolbar is not displayed on the
1241
 
                                                Drawing toolbar. To display the 3D-Objects toolbar, on the
1242
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">View</emphasis> menu, point to <emphasis role="strong">
1243
 
                                                Toolbars</emphasis> and then click <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects
1244
 
                                                </emphasis>.</para>
1245
 
                                                <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting 3D Graphics</emphasis></title>
1246
 
                                                        <mediaobject><imageobject>
1247
 
                                                                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_061.png" format="PNG"/>
1248
 
                                                        </imageobject></mediaobject>
1249
 
                                                </figure>
1250
 
                                                <tip>
1251
 
                                                        <title>Nice to Know:</title>
1252
 
                                                        <para>You can also display the 3D-Objects toolbar by clicking the small
1253
 
                                                        arrow at the end of the Drawing toolbar and selecting it from the Visible
1254
 
                                                        Buttons list.</para>
1255
 
                                                </tip>
1256
 
                                                </listitem>
1257
 
                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects toolbar</emphasis> appears
1258
 
                                                as a floating toolbar. If you do not like floating toolbars,
1259
 
                                                you can place it on one of the existing toolbars. To dock the
1260
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects toolbar</emphasis>, drag the title bar of
1261
 
                                                the toolbar to the desired location and release the mouse button.</para>
1262
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The 3D-Objects Toolbar</emphasis></title>
1263
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1264
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_062.png" format="PNG"/>
1265
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1266
 
                                                        </figure>
1267
 
                                                </listitem>
1268
 
                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects toolbar</emphasis> is
1269
 
                                                now attached to the <emphasis role="strong">Line and Filling toolbar</emphasis>.
1270
 
                                                You can pick up objects from this toolbar and insert them into your slides. To
1271
 
                                                insert a 3D Object on your current slide, click the desired object on the 3
1272
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">D-Objects toolbar</emphasis>. Then, move your mouse
1273
 
                                                to the point where you want to insert the object. You can see a plus sign
1274
 
                                                in place of the mouse tip. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the
1275
 
                                                mouse to insert the object on the slide. The selected 3D object appears on
1276
 
                                                the slide.</para>
1277
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting a 3D Object</emphasis></title>
1278
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1279
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_063.png" format="PNG"/>
1280
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1281
 
                                                        </figure>
1282
 
                                                </listitem>
1283
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can change the proportion and size of the object by holding
1284
 
                                                the green handles that appear around it. Impress also provides you tools to
1285
 
                                                apply a number of 3D effects on the object to modify its look and feel as per
1286
 
                                                your requirements. To apply 3D effects on the inserted graphic, right-click
1287
 
                                                the object. On the short-cut menu, click <emphasis role="strong">3D Effects
1288
 
                                                </emphasis>. The <emphasis role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis> dialogue box
1289
 
                                                opens.</para>
1290
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Applying 3D Effects</emphasis></title>
1291
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1292
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_064.png" format="PNG"/>
1293
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1294
 
                                                        </figure>
1295
 
                                                </listitem>
1296
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can use the options available under the different buttons
1297
 
                                                in this dialogue box to define the look and feel of the inserted object.
1298
 
                                                Click the <emphasis role="strong">Illumination</emphasis> button to fine-
1299
 
                                                tune the illumination effect on the object. You can select the appropriate
1300
 
                                                options from the drop-down lists to render the desired illumination effect
1301
 
                                                to the object. Alternatively, you can simply drag the white dot in the
1302
 
                                                graphic at the bottom of the dialogue box and move it to get the desired
1303
 
                                                effect.</para></listitem>
1304
 
                                                <listitem><para>After specifying the desired options, click the
1305
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Assign</emphasis> icon on the top right of the
1306
 
                                                dialogue box to apply the effects on the selected object. Click
1307
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Close</emphasis> to exit the
1308
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
1309
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Defining 3D Effects</emphasis></title>
1310
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1311
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_065.png" format="PNG"/>
1312
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1313
 
                                                        </figure>
1314
 
                                                <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
1315
 
                                                <para><emphasis role="italic">If you have enough time, you can also demonstrate the procedure of converting
1316
 
                                                2D objects into 3D objects and applying the finer 3D effects to it.</emphasis></para></instructornote>
1317
 
                                                </listitem>
1318
 
                                                <listitem><para>Notice that with a couple of mouse clicks, the 3D object has
1319
 
                                                got a complete new look. In a similar fashion, you can add many more 3D and
1320
 
                                                2D elements to your presentation and apply various 3D effects to jazz it up.
1321
 
                                                Impress also offers some animation functionality to help you bring life to your presentations. To display
1322
 
                                                the animation options available in Impress, on the <emphasis role="strong">
1323
 
                                                Slide Show</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis role="strong">Custom
1324
 
                                                Animation</emphasis>.</para>
1325
 
                                                        <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Custom Animations</emphasis> panel
1326
 
                                                        now appears on the right edge of the presentation window.</para>
1327
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Applying Custom Animation</emphasis></title>
1328
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1329
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_066.png" format="PNG"/>
1330
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1331
 
                                                        </figure>
1332
 
                                                </listitem>
1333
 
                                                <listitem><para>To apply an animation effect on an individual element in
1334
 
                                                your slide, select that element and click the <emphasis role="strong">Add
1335
 
                                                </emphasis> button on the <emphasis role="strong">Custom Animation</emphasis>
1336
 
                                                panel. The Custom Animation dialogue box opens.</para>
1337
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Animating Objects</emphasis></title>
1338
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1339
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_067.png" format="PNG"/>
1340
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1341
 
                                                        </figure>
1342
 
                                                </listitem>
1343
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can now apply various animations to the selected object,
1344
 
                                                define the entrance and exit animation for it and chart a motion path for
1345
 
                                                the object. Similarly, you can specify animation effects for other elements
1346
 
                                                on the slides.</para>
1347
 
                                                        <para>After defining all the desired settings for the object, click
1348
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the animation effects.</para>
1349
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Customising Animation Effects</emphasis></title>
1350
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1351
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_068.png" format="PNG"/>
1352
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1353
 
                                                        </figure>
1354
 
                                                </listitem>
1355
 
                                                <listitem><para>The specified animations can be viewed at the bottom of the
1356
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Custom Animations</emphasis> panel. You can now view
1357
 
                                                the animation effects in a slide show. Click the <emphasis role="strong">Slide
1358
 
                                                Show</emphasis> button to view the presentation as a slide show.</para>
1359
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Launching a Slide Show</emphasis></title>
1360
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1361
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_069.png" format="PNG"/>
1362
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1363
 
                                                        </figure>
1364
 
                                                </listitem>
1365
 
                                                <listitem><para>Your presentation runs as a spectacular and lively slide show.</para>
1366
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The spectacular Slide Show</emphasis></title>
1367
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1368
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_070.png" format="PNG"/>
1369
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1370
 
                                                        </figure>
1371
 
                                                </listitem>
1372
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1373
 
                                </para>
1374
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Exporting a Presentation</emphasis></para>
1375
 
                                <para>As stated earlier, another useful feature associated with Impress is that it has
1376
 
                                the built-in capacity to export presentations directly into several other file formats.
1377
 
                                As a result, Impress allows you to export your slide shows directly as Flash (SWF) files.</para>
1378
 
                                <para>To export your presentation as an SWF file:
1379
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1380
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
1381
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Export.</emphasis> This opens the
1382
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Export</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
1383
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Exporting a Presentation</emphasis></title>
1384
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1385
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_071.png" format="PNG"/>
1386
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1387
 
                                                        </figure>
1388
 
                                                </listitem>
1389
 
                                                <listitem><para>Here, you need to specify a file name in the
1390
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Name</emphasis> field and navigate to the directory
1391
 
                                                where you want to export the file. To export the presentation as a Flash
1392
 
                                                file, select <emphasis role="strong">Macromedia Flash (SWF) (.swf)</emphasis>
1393
 
                                                from the file type drop-down list and click <emphasis role="strong">Save
1394
 
                                                </emphasis>. The file is exported to the indicated location. You can now
1395
 
                                                view the presentation as a Flash file.</para>
1396
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Exporting Presentation as a Flash File</emphasis></title>
1397
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1398
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_072.png" format="PNG"/>
1399
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1400
 
                                                        </figure>
1401
 
                                                </listitem>
1402
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1403
 
                                </para>
1404
 
                        </sect2>
1405
 
                </sect1>
1406
 
                        <sect1>
1407
 
                        <title>Using OpenOffice.org Draw</title>
1408
 
                        <para>Draw is a vector graphics drawing tool that enables you to create simple and 
1409
 
                        complex drawings and export them in a number of common image formats. 
1410
 
                        Draw also allows you to insert tables, charts, formulas and other items created in 
1411
 
                        OpenOffice.org programmes into your drawings.</para>
1412
 
                                <note>
1413
 
                                        <title>Note:</title>
1414
 
                                        <para>Graphics that are created using a vector graphics drawing tool do not blur when resized.</para>
1415
 
                                </note>                         
1416
 
                                <para>Draw is integrated with the OpenOffice.org suite, making it easy toexchange of graphics with 
1417
 
                                                                other components of the suite. For example, if you create an image in Draw, reusing it in
1418
 
                                                                Writer is as simple as copying and pasting the image. 
1419
 
                                                                A subset of the functions in Draw are also available in Writer and Impress, so you do not have 
1420
 
                                                                to switch back and forth between them and Draw to perform basic image manipulations.</para>
1421
 
                        <sect2>
1422
 
                                <title>Key Features of OpenOffice.org Draw</title>
1423
 
                                <note>
1424
 
                                        <title>Note:</title>
1425
 
                                        <para>Vector drawing software follows a common notation for referring to all shapes, 
1426
 
                                                                        whether simple lines, rectangles or more complicated shapes, as objects.</para>
1427
 
                                </note>
1428
 
                                <para>Draw provides extensive functionality that integrates more functions than the
1429
 
                                majority of drawing tools available in office suites. Some of the key features of Draw
1430
 
                                are:
1431
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
1432
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vector Graphics Creation</emphasis>: You
1433
 
                                                can create vector graphics in Draw by using the lines and curves defined by
1434
 
                                                mathematical vectors. Vectors describe lines, ellipses and polygons according to
1435
 
                                                their geometry.</para></listitem>
1436
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">3D Objects Creation</emphasis>: In Draw,
1437
 
                                                you can create simple 3D objects, such as cubes, spheres and cylinders, and modify
1438
 
                                                the light source of the objects.</para></listitem>
1439
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Grids and Guides:</emphasis> You can align
1440
 
                                                objects in your drawing by using grids and guides as visual cues. You can also snap
1441
 
                                                an object to a grid line, a guide or to the edge of another object.</para></listitem>
1442
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Connecting Objects to Show Relationships:</emphasis> 
1443
 
                                                        You can attach objects to each other using special lines called connectors to show the 
1444
 
                                                        relationship between those objects.
1445
 
                                                        Connectors attach to glue points on drawing objects and remain attached when those objects move.
1446
 
                                                These are useful for creating things like organisation charts and technical diagrams.</para></listitem>
1447
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Displaying Dimensions:</emphasis> You can
1448
 
                                                use dimension lines to calculate and display linear dimensions in technical diagrams,
1449
 
                                                which often show the dimensions of the objects in the drawing.</para></listitem>
1450
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Gallery:</emphasis> You can insert and use
1451
 
                                                images, animations, sounds and other items from the OpenOffice.org gallery in your
1452
 
                                                drawings as well as in other OpenOffice.org programmes.</para></listitem>
1453
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Graphic File Formats:</emphasis> Export
1454
 
                                                your creation to many common graphic file formats, such as BMP, GIF, JPG and PNG.
1455
 
                                                </para></listitem>
1456
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
1457
 
                                </para>
1458
 
                        </sect2>
1459
 
                        <sect2>
1460
 
                                <title>Performing Basic Drawing Operations</title>
1461
 
                                <para>To launch OpenOffice.org Draw:
1462
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1463
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu, point
1464
 
                                                to <emphasis role="strong">Accessories</emphasis> and click <emphasis role="strong">
1465
 
                                                Terminal</emphasis> to display the <emphasis role="strong">Terminal</emphasis> window.
1466
 
                                                In the <emphasis role="strong">Terminal</emphasis> window, type oodraw to launch
1467
 
                                                OpenOffice.org Draw.</para>
1468
 
                                                        <para>The main components of the <emphasis role="strong">Draw</emphasis> window are
1469
 
                                                        shown in the following graphic:</para>
1470
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Draw Window</emphasis></title>
1471
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1472
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_073.png" format="PNG"/>
1473
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1474
 
                                                        </figure>
1475
 
                                                </listitem>
1476
 
                                                <listitem><para>The drawings are created in the drawing area, which is surrounded by
1477
 
                                                the following toolbars:</para>
1478
 
                                                        <itemizedlist>
1479
 
                                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Menu</emphasis> bar lists the main
1480
 
                                                                menus available in Draw. It includes options to manage, edit and view the format
1481
 
                                                                of your drawings.</para></listitem>
1482
 
                                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Function</emphasis> bar displays
1483
 
                                                                icons to perform tasks such as Open, Save, Copy, Cut and Paste.</para></listitem>
1484
 
                                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Line and Filling</emphasis> bar
1485
 
                                                                includes specific drawing tools to modify the appearance of a selected object
1486
 
                                                                such as line style, colour and thickness; fill style and colour.</para></listitem>
1487
 
                                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> toolbar is the most
1488
 
                                                                important toolbar in Draw. It contains all the necessary functions for drawing
1489
 
                                                                various geometric and freehand shapes. Creating basic shapes in Draw requires the
1490
 
                                                                extensive use of this toolbar. However, you have to further edit, combine and
1491
 
                                                                manipulate them to create complex objects.</para>
1492
 
                                                                        <para>You can vary the number and position of the visible tools to make the
1493
 
                                                                        interface look a bit different. To add or remove a toolbar from the Draw
1494
 
                                                                        window:</para></listitem>
1495
 
                                                        </itemizedlist>
1496
 
                                                </listitem>
1497
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">View</emphasis> menu, point to
1498
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Toolbars.</emphasis> The <emphasis role="strong">Toolbar
1499
 
                                                </emphasis> list displays the toolbars available, with a check mark next to the
1500
 
                                                toolbars that are displayed. To remove a toolbar from the Draw window, clear the
1501
 
                                                corresponding check mark and click the toolbar without a check mark to add it to
1502
 
                                                the window.</para></listitem>
1503
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1504
 
                                </para>
1505
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Creating Objects</emphasis></para>
1506
 
                                <para>To create an object by using the Drawing toolbar:
1507
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1508
 
                                                <listitem><para>Click a specific object button such as <emphasis role="strong">
1509
 
                                                Rectangle</emphasis> or <emphasis role="strong">Ellipse</emphasis> on the
1510
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> toolbar, and place the mouse cursor
1511
 
                                                at the point in the drawing area where you want the object to start.</para></listitem>
1512
 
                                                <listitem><para>Press the left button on the mouse, drag the cursor to where you
1513
 
                                                want the object to end and release the button. The object appears in the Drawing
1514
 
                                                area.</para></listitem>
1515
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1516
 
                                </para>
1517
 
                                <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
1518
 
                                                                <para><emphasis role="italic">The Drawing toolbar is not discussed in detail because you use its 
1519
 
                                                                options to draw only basic shapes. For novice users, demonstrate the creation of a few objects, 
1520
 
                                                                such as square, rectangle and connector.  
1521
 
                                                                Visit <ulink url="http://documentation.openoffice.org/">http://documentation.openoffice.org/</ulink> 
1522
 
                                                                for more details on OpenOfice.org products.</emphasis></para>
1523
 
                                </instructornote>
1524
 
                                <para>Selecting Objects</para>
1525
 
                                <para>Before making any changes to an object, you need to select the object. Draw provides
1526
 
                                the following options to select an object:
1527
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
1528
 
                                                <listitem><para>Direct Selection: Click the object to select it.</para></listitem>
1529
 
                                                <listitem><para>Selection by Framing: On the <emphasis role="strong">Drawing
1530
 
                                                </emphasis> toolbar, click the <emphasis role="strong">Select</emphasis> button and
1531
 
                                                drag a large rectangle around the object to select it. This option is useful for
1532
 
                                                selecting multiple objects in the drawing area.</para>
1533
 
                                                        <note>
1534
 
                                                                <title>Note:</title>
1535
 
                                                                <para>You have to enclose the object(s) completely in the rectangle to select
1536
 
                                                                them.</para>
1537
 
                                                        </note>
1538
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting by Framing</emphasis></title>
1539
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1540
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_074.png" format="PNG"/>
1541
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1542
 
                                                        </figure>
1543
 
                                                </listitem>
1544
 
                                                <listitem><para>Selecting hidden objects: To select an object that is covered by
1545
 
                                                another object, press Alt key and click the object you want to select.</para>
1546
 
                                                        <note>
1547
 
                                                                <title>Note:</title>
1548
 
                                                                <para>To be able to select a hidden object, you must know the position of that
1549
 
                                                                object relative to the objects on top.</para>
1550
 
                                                        </note>
1551
 
                                                </listitem>
1552
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
1553
 
                                </para>
1554
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Editing Objects</emphasis></para>
1555
 
                                <para>When creating objects, you may have to edit them or change their properties to get the
1556
 
                                desired output. However, you may not always find that flexibility in the default software
1557
 
                                settings. For example, you cannot change the shape of the square to a rectangle or rotate the
1558
 
                                square on its own axis by using the default <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis>
1559
 
                                toolbar. To perform these tasks, Draw provides various other options with the required
1560
 
                                flexibility, such as:</para>
1561
 
                                <note>
1562
 
                                        <title>Note:</title>
1563
 
                                        <para>All the options covered in the subsequent sections apply to a
1564
 
                                        selected object or a group of objects. You can identify a selected object from any other
1565
 
                                        by the small, coloured square or circle around the object. These squares or circles are
1566
 
                                        called handles and form a rectangular frame that is just big enough to contain the
1567
 
                                        object.</para>
1568
 
                                </note>
1569
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Modifying Object Size</emphasis></para>
1570
 
                                <para>To change the size of an object:
1571
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1572
 
                                                <listitem><para>In the Drawing area, select the created object by clicking it.
1573
 
                                                Handles appear on the object.</para>
1574
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting an Object</emphasis></title>
1575
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1576
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_075.png" format="PNG"/>
1577
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1578
 
                                                        </figure>
1579
 
                                                </listitem>
1580
 
                                                <listitem><para>Place the mouse cursor over one of the handles. When the cursor
1581
 
                                                becomes a double-headed arrow, drag the cursor in the direction of the arrow to
1582
 
                                                modify the size of the object. If you choose a corner handle, you will resize the
1583
 
                                                object along two axes at the same time. If you use a side handle, the objects will
1584
 
                                                only be resized along one axis. The outline of the resulting new object appears as
1585
 
                                                a dotted line.</para></listitem>
1586
 
                                                <listitem><para>Release the mouse button when the object is sized correctly. The
1587
 
                                                dotted line disappears, and the resized object appears.</para>
1588
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Modifying the Object</emphasis></title>
1589
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1590
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_076.png" format="PNG"/>
1591
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1592
 
                                                        </figure>
1593
 
                                                </listitem>
1594
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1595
 
                                </para>
1596
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Arranging Objects</emphasis></para>
1597
 
                                <para>If the document you are working on includes many overlapping objects, editing of
1598
 
                                individual objects (which may or may not be visible) might pose a challenge. 
1599
 
                          Fortunately, Draw provides a way to rearrange objects without affecting their layout.</para>
1600
 
                                <para>To change the arrangement of objects:
1601
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1602
 
                                                <listitem><para>In the drawing area, right-click the object you want to rearrange,
1603
 
                                                point to <emphasis role="strong">Arrange</emphasis> and select the appropriate option
1604
 
                                                from the <emphasis role="strong">Arrange</emphasis> list.</para>
1605
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Rearranging the Object</emphasis></title>
1606
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1607
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_077.png" format="PNG"/>
1608
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1609
 
                                                        </figure>
1610
 
                                                </listitem>
1611
 
                                                <listitem><para>If you select the <emphasis role="strong">Send Backward</emphasis>
1612
 
                                                option, the output is as shown in the following graphic:</para>
1613
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Object Sent Backwards</emphasis></title>
1614
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1615
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_078.png" format="PNG"/>
1616
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1617
 
                                                        </figure>
1618
 
                                                        <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
1619
 
                                                                <para><emphasis role="italic">If time permits, ask the students to explore the other options 
1620
 
                                                                        in the Arrange list. In addition, explain which option to use under what circumstances. 
1621
 
                                                                        Specifically discuss the <emphasis role="strong">Behind Object </emphasis> option and the 
1622
 
                                                                        difference between the output from the <emphasis role="strong">Send to Back</emphasis> 
1623
 
                                                                        and <emphasis role="strong">Behind Object</emphasis> options. 
1624
 
                                                                        This is a low-priority activity.</emphasis></para></instructornote></listitem>
1625
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1626
 
                                </para>
1627
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Duplicating Objects</emphasis></para>
1628
 
                                <para>Often, you may need to create multiple objects of the same shape and size.
1629
 
                                In Draw, you can duplicate or make multiple copies of an object. 
1630
 
                                The copies can be identical or differ in size, colour, orientation and location.</para>
1631
 
                                <para>To create multiple copies of an object:
1632
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1633
 
                                                <listitem><para>Click the object to be copied, click <emphasis role="strong">Edit
1634
 
                                                </emphasis> and select the <emphasis role="strong">Duplicate</emphasis> option. The
1635
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Duplicate</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para></listitem>
1636
 
                                                <listitem><para>Specify the appropriate values in the <emphasis role="strong">Duplicate
1637
 
                                                </emphasis> dialogue box, and click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to display
1638
 
                                                the output in the drawing area.</para>
1639
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Duplicating Objects</emphasis></title>
1640
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1641
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_079.png" format="PNG"/>
1642
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1643
 
                                                        </figure>
1644
 
                                                </listitem>
1645
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1646
 
                                </para>
1647
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Grouping and Combining Objects</emphasis></para>
1648
 
                                <para>When creating or editing an object, the object might be displaced from its original
1649
 
                                position. This change in location disturbs the relative position of the object to the others
1650
 
                                in the drawing. This could be critical where accuracy, in terms of position, is important
1651
 
                                such as in architectural drawings. Using Draw, you can combine drawing objects in two distinct
1652
 
                                ways, grouping and combining.</para>
1653
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Grouping Objects</emphasis></para>
1654
 
                                <para>Grouping objects is like putting them into a container, where the objects are grouped
1655
 
                                with each other but retain their individual identities. You can move the group as one entity
1656
 
                                and apply changes to all the enclosed objects. A group can always be undone, and the objects
1657
 
                                that constitute the group can always be manipulated separately.</para>
1658
 
                                <para>To group objects:
1659
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1660
 
                                                <listitem><para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> area, select all the
1661
 
                                                objects you want to include in the group. Right click any selected object, and then
1662
 
                                                select the <emphasis role="strong">Group</emphasis> option.</para></listitem>
1663
 
                                                <listitem><para>Click any object in the group; handles appear around the entire group
1664
 
                                                instead of around an object.</para></listitem>
1665
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1666
 
                                </para>
1667
 
                                <para>You can now modify the entire group, without applying effects to objects individually.
1668
 
                                To resize a group:
1669
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
1670
 
                                                <listitem><para>Place the mouse cursor over one of the handles. When the cursor
1671
 
                                                becomes a double-headed arrow, drag the cursor to increase or decrease the size of the
1672
 
                                                objects in the group. All the objects in the group are resized equally.</para></listitem>
1673
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
1674
 
                                </para>
1675
 
                                <para>You can also edit a single object in the group without breaking it. To edit individual
1676
 
                                objects in a group:
1677
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1678
 
                                                <listitem><para>Double-click an object in the group. You can now enter the group and
1679
 
                                                work on individual objects.</para></listitem>
1680
 
                                                <listitem><para>Click the object you want to edit; the handles appear around that
1681
 
                                                object. In this mode, you can edit, add or delete this object.</para></listitem>
1682
 
                                                <listitem><para>To re-instate the group after modifying the object, double-click
1683
 
                                                anywhere outside the selection frame.</para></listitem>
1684
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1685
 
                                </para>
1686
 
                                <note>
1687
 
                                        <title>Note:</title>
1688
 
                                        <para>You can group objects of all shapes and sizes. You can group
1689
 
                                        objects in 2D, 3D or a combination of both. However, you can combine only overlapping 2D
1690
 
                                        objects.</para>
1691
 
                                </note>
1692
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Combining Objects</emphasis></para>
1693
 
                                <para>Combining drawing objects is similar to grouping, except that combining creates a permanent
1694
 
                                fusion of objects, leading to the formation of a new object. The original objects are no longer
1695
 
                                available as individual entities, and you cannot enter the group to edit the individual objects.
1696
 
                                When you combine the objects, the group takes on the properties of the lower-most object in the
1697
 
                                arrangement.</para>
1698
 
                                <para>To combine objects:
1699
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1700
 
                                                <listitem><para>In the drawing area, select multiple 2D objects.</para>
1701
 
                                                        <note>
1702
 
                                                                <title>Note:</title>
1703
 
                                                                <para>The lower-most object in the following graphic is the blue object.</para>
1704
 
                                                        </note>
1705
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Combining Objects</emphasis></title>
1706
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1707
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_080.png" format="PNG"/>
1708
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1709
 
                                                        </figure>
1710
 
                                                </listitem>
1711
 
                                                <listitem><para>Right-click any of the objects in the selection and click the Combine
1712
 
                                                option in the list. Where the objects overlap, the overlapping zone is either filled
1713
 
                                                or empty, depending on the number of overlaps. When the number of overlaps is even,
1714
 
                                                you get an empty space. When the number of overlaps is odd, you get a filled area.</para>
1715
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Overlapping Zone</emphasis></title>
1716
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1717
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_081.png" format="PNG"/>
1718
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1719
 
                                                        </figure>
1720
 
                                                </listitem>
1721
 
                                                <listitem><para>After you have combined the objects, you can select the combined
1722
 
                                                objects as an entity. However, you will not be able to select the empty area in
1723
 
                                                the object.</para></listitem>
1724
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1725
 
                                </para>
1726
 
                                <para>To split the objects:
1727
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
1728
 
                                                <listitem><para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> area, right-click
1729
 
                                                the combination created in the previous procedure and select the
1730
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Split</emphasis> option from the list.</para>
1731
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Splitting Objects</emphasis></title>
1732
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1733
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_082.png" format="PNG"/>
1734
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1735
 
                                                        </figure>
1736
 
                                                        <para>Note that the objects return to their original status. However, the
1737
 
                                                        properties of the objects have now changed as per the last object in the
1738
 
                                                        arrangement.</para></listitem>
1739
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
1740
 
                                </para>
1741
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Editing Colours and Textures</emphasis></para>
1742
 
                                <para>When creating a drawing, you may need to work with objects of variable colours and
1743
 
                                textures in the same drawing area. You can customise the area fill of an object by using the
1744
 
                                <emphasis role="strong">Line and Fill</emphasis> toolbar.</para>
1745
 
                                <note>
1746
 
                                        <title>Note:</title>
1747
 
                                        <para>The OpenOffice.org term for the inside of an object is area
1748
 
                                        fill. The area fill of an object can be of uniform colour, a gradient or an image.</para>
1749
 
                                </note>
1750
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Editing a Colour Fill</emphasis></para>
1751
 
                                <para>To edit the colour fill of an object:
1752
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1753
 
                                                <listitem><para>In the drawing area, select the object you want to edit and click
1754
 
                                                the <emphasis role="strong">Area</emphasis> button on the <emphasis role="strong">
1755
 
                                                Line and Fill</emphasis> toolbar. The <emphasis role="strong">Area</emphasis>
1756
 
                                                dialogue box opens.</para>
1757
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Editing a Colour Fill</emphasis></title>
1758
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1759
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_083.png" format="PNG"/>
1760
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1761
 
                                                        </figure>
1762
 
                                                </listitem>
1763
 
                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Area</emphasis> dialogue box provides
1764
 
                                                the option to change the existing colour fill of the object. Click the
1765
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Colours</emphasis> tab, select a colour listed under the
1766
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Table</emphasis> category and click
1767
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the change.</para>
1768
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a Colour Fill</emphasis></title>
1769
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1770
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_084.png" format="PNG"/>
1771
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1772
 
                                                        </figure>
1773
 
                                                </listitem>
1774
 
                                                <listitem><para>The Table category lists the standard colours or the colours that are
1775
 
                                                used most often. However, if you need a colour or shade that is not available in the
1776
 
                                                list, go ahead and create it! To define a custom colour:</para>
1777
 
                                                        <orderedlist numeration="loweralpha">
1778
 
                                                                <listitem><para>Click the standard colour closest to your needs, and specify
1779
 
                                                                the RGB ratio to change its tone and hue.</para>
1780
 
                                                                        <note>
1781
 
                                                                                <title>Note:</title>
1782
 
                                                                                <para>Draw provides you two options to define a colour. You can
1783
 
                                                                                specify the colour in the RGB or CMYK ratio. For CMYK, click RGB and
1784
 
                                                                                then select CMYK from the options.</para>
1785
 
                                                                        </note>
1786
 
                                                                </listitem>
1787
 
                                                                <listitem><para>If you want to add a new custom colour to the available list,
1788
 
                                                                type its name in the Name box, specify the RGB ratio and click Add. The
1789
 
                                                                standard list under the Table category displays the new colour.</para>
1790
 
                                                                        <tip>
1791
 
                                                                                <title>Nice to Know:</title>
1792
 
                                                                                <para>Every colour is specified by a combination of the three primary
1793
 
                                                                                colours, Red, Green and Blue, hence the notation RGB.</para>
1794
 
                                                                        </tip>
1795
 
                                                                </listitem>
1796
 
                                                                <listitem><para>Click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the change.
1797
 
                                                                </para></listitem>
1798
 
                                                        </orderedlist>
1799
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Customised Colour Fill</emphasis></title>
1800
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1801
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_085.png" format="PNG"/>
1802
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1803
 
                                                        </figure>
1804
 
                                                </listitem>
1805
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1806
 
                                </para>
1807
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Editing a Gradient Fill</emphasis></para>
1808
 
                                <para>A gradient is a smooth transition between two different colours or shades of the
1809
 
                                same colour, which you can apply to a drawing object. To edit the gradient fill of an
1810
 
                                object:</para>
1811
 
                                <para>In the Drawing area, select the object you want to edit and click the Area button
1812
 
                                on the Line and Fill toolbar. The <emphasis role="strong">Area</emphasis> dialogue box
1813
 
                                opens.</para>
1814
 
                                <para>Click the <emphasis role="strong">Gradients</emphasis> tab, select a gradient from
1815
 
                                the gradient list and click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the change to
1816
 
                                the object.</para>
1817
 
                                <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Editing a Gradient Fill</emphasis></title>
1818
 
                                        <mediaobject><imageobject>
1819
 
                                                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_086.png" format="PNG"/>
1820
 
                                        </imageobject></mediaobject>
1821
 
                                </figure>
1822
 
                                <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
1823
 
                                <para><emphasis role="italic">Mention that by using the Area dialogue box, 
1824
 
                                        students can also add or modify the other properties of objects such as using a shadow on an object, 
1825
 
                                        increasing or decreasing transparency, crosshatching the object or adding their own bitmap images 
1826
 
                                        as the area fill of the object.</emphasis></para></instructornote>
1827
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Editing Text</emphasis></para>
1828
 
                                <para>Draw provides you the following options to insert text in the
1829
 
                                <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> area:
1830
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
1831
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">The Text tool on the Drawing toolbar:
1832
 
                                                </emphasis> You can create a text frame anywhere in the drawing area, and you
1833
 
                                                can work with this text box like you do with any other object.</para></listitem>
1834
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Callouts next to the object:</emphasis>
1835
 
                                                You can use this when you want to relate the text to the object. Click the
1836
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Callouts</emphasis> tool on the <emphasis role="strong">
1837
 
                                                Drawing</emphasis> toolbar.</para></listitem>
1838
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Text superimposed on a drawing object:
1839
 
                                                </emphasis> Double-click the object. A text box opens. Type the necessary text in
1840
 
                                                it.</para></listitem>
1841
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
1842
 
                                </para>
1843
 
                                <para>The following graphic displays various options for inserting text relevant to an
1844
 
                                object in the Drawing area:</para>
1845
 
                                <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Editing Text in the Drawing Area</emphasis></title>
1846
 
                                        <mediaobject><imageobject>
1847
 
                                                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_087.png" format="PNG"/>
1848
 
                                        </imageobject></mediaobject>
1849
 
                                </figure>
1850
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Visual Effects</emphasis></para>
1851
 
                                <para>Apart from offering the basic drawing tools, Draw provides scope for you to add
1852
 
                                some visual effects to your drawings.</para>
1853
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Cross-Fading</emphasis></para>
1854
 
                                <para>The cross-fading feature in Draw transforms one shape into another. The result is
1855
 
                                a new group of objects, including the start and end objects and the intermediate
1856
 
                                shapes.</para>
1857
 
                                <para>To cross-fade:
1858
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1859
 
                                                <listitem><para>Create two objects of different shapes in the drawing area and
1860
 
                                                select them.</para>
1861
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Applying Visual Effects</emphasis></title>
1862
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1863
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_088.png" format="PNG"/>
1864
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1865
 
                                                        </figure>
1866
 
                                                </listitem>
1867
 
                                                <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Edit</emphasis> menu, click the
1868
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Cross-fading</emphasis> option to display the
1869
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Cross-fading</emphasis> dialogue box.</para></listitem>
1870
 
                                                <listitem><para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Cross-fading</emphasis> dialogue
1871
 
                                                box, select the number of incremental objects between the ends. Retain the default
1872
 
                                                selection for smoother transition, and click OK to display the result in the drawing
1873
 
                                                area.</para>
1874
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Cross-Faded Objects</emphasis></title>
1875
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1876
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_089.png" format="PNG"/>
1877
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1878
 
                                                        </figure>
1879
 
                                                </listitem>
1880
 
                                        </orderedlist>
1881
 
                                </para>
1882
 
                                <note>
1883
 
                                        <title>Note:</title>
1884
 
                                        <para>You can vary the order of the objects by changing their
1885
 
                                        arrangement in the drawing area.</para>
1886
 
                                </note>
1887
 
                                <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
1888
 
                                        <para><emphasis role="italic">Draw provides many more features and tools. 
1889
 
                                        For more information on the detailed features of Draw and other OpenOffice.org applications, 
1890
 
                                        refer the students to 
1891
 
                                        <ulink url="http://documentation.openoffice.org/">http://documentation.openoffice.org/</ulink>.
1892
 
                                        </emphasis></para></instructornote>
1893
 
                        </sect2>
1894
 
                </sect1>
1895
 
                <sect1>
1896
 
                        <title>Using OpenOffice.org Math</title>
1897
 
                        <para>Math is the equation writer component of OpenOffice.org office software suite.
1898
 
                        It contains a number of functions, operators and formatting assistants to help you
1899
 
                        create properly formatted equations and formulae. These formulae can then be
1900
 
                        imported for display in any other OpenOffice.org applications.</para>
1901
 
                        <sect2>
1902
 
                                <title>Key Features of OpenOffice.org Math</title>
1903
 
                                <para>Some of the important features and capabilities of Math are discussed in
1904
 
                                the following section:
1905
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
1906
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Creating a Formula:</emphasis> Math
1907
 
                                                offers you the convenience of creating formulae as objects within your document.
1908
 
                                                You can invoke Math from inside a document whenever you need to
1909
 
                                                insert a formula or equation into the document. With Math, you have a large selection
1910
 
                                                of pre-defined symbols and functions at your disposal for creating, editing and
1911
 
                                                formatting a formulae.</para></listitem>
1912
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Typing a Formula Directly:</emphasis>If you are familiar with
1913
 
                                                the Math markup language, you can also type an equation directly in your document
1914
 
                                                and then invoke Math to convert the markup into a formatted formula.</para></listitem>
1915
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Creating a Formula in the Commands Window:
1916
 
                                                </emphasis> While you make entries in the commands window, you can simultaneously
1917
 
                                                view the results in the document.</para></listitem>
1918
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Creating Individual Symbols:</emphasis> Why not create or own
1919
 
                                                symbols and import new characters from other fonts? You can add the new symbols in the basic math 
1920
 
                                                catalogue or create a new catalogue for the new symbols.</para></listitem>
1921
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Creating Formulae in Context:</emphasis> Math
1922
 
                                                provides you the ease of working with the context menus, which can be displayed at a right
1923
 
                                                mouse-click. These context menus contain all commands that are found on the Selection
1924
 
                                                window. Moreover, you can insert these into the document with just a mouse
1925
 
                                                click.</para></listitem>
1926
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
1927
 
                                </para>
1928
 
                                <note>
1929
 
                                        <title>Note:</title>
1930
 
                                        <para>Math is only used to create properly formatted equations in its
1931
 
                                        symbolic form. It cannot be used for calculation purposes.</para>
1932
 
                                </note>
1933
 
                        </sect2>
1934
 
                        <sect2>
1935
 
                                <title>Creating and Editing Formulae</title>
1936
 
                                <para>Though Math can be used with all the OpenOffice.org applications, it is primarily used
1937
 
                                as an equation editor with text documents.</para>
1938
 
                                <para>To be able to use Math when working with Writer perform the following steps:
1939
 
                                        <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
1940
 
                                                <listitem><para>Position the cursor on the document where you want to insert the
1941
 
                                                formula. On the Insert menu, point to <emphasis role="strong">Object</emphasis>
1942
 
                                                and then click <emphasis role="strong">Formula</emphasis>.</para>
1943
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Launching Math</emphasis></title>
1944
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1945
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_090.png" format="PNG"/>
1946
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1947
 
                                                        </figure>
1948
 
                                                </listitem>
1949
 
                                                <listitem><para>This invokes Math from inside the Writer window. Notice that the
1950
 
                                                equation editor appears at the bottom of the document window. You can now access
1951
 
                                                all the Math tools from inside the Writer window. A placeholder box appears besides
1952
 
                                                the text where the equation is to be entered.</para>
1953
 
                                                        <para>The simplest method to enter an equation in your document is to use the
1954
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window. By default, the
1955
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window is not displayed. To display
1956
 
                                                        the <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window, on the
1957
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">View</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis role="strong">
1958
 
                                                        Selection</emphasis>.</para>
1959
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Displaying the Selection Window</emphasis></title>
1960
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1961
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_091.png" format="PNG"/>
1962
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1963
 
                                                        </figure>
1964
 
                                                </listitem>
1965
 
                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window appears as
1966
 
                                                a floating toolbar. Notice that the <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis>
1967
 
                                                window is divided into two halves. The upper half contains the symbol categories, 
1968
 
                                                and the lower half displays the symbols available in the selected category.
1969
 
                                                You can now start inserting the equation by selecting the symbols from the
1970
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window.</para>
1971
 
                                                        <para>To insert a symbol, such as "a/b" select the appropriate category from the
1972
 
                                                        upper half and click the appropriate symbol from the lower half of the
1973
 
                                                        <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window.</para>
1974
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Using the Selection Window</emphasis></title>
1975
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1976
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_092.png" format="PNG"/>
1977
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1978
 
                                                        </figure>
1979
 
                                                </listitem>
1980
 
                                                <listitem><para>You will notice that when you select the symbol on the
1981
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window, the markup for the selected
1982
 
                                                symbol appears in the equation editor. Simultaneously, some grey boxes appear in
1983
 
                                                the main text body.</para>
1984
 
                                                        <para>The <emphasis role="strong">&lt;?&gt;</emphasis> symbols appearing in the
1985
 
                                                        equation editor are placeholders where you need to enter the actual text or
1986
 
                                                        symbol associated with your formula.</para>
1987
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting Symbols</emphasis></title>
1988
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
1989
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_093.png" format="PNG"/>
1990
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
1991
 
                                                        </figure>
1992
 
                                                </listitem>
1993
 
                                                <listitem><para>As you enter the required text or symbol into the placeholders, the
1994
 
                                                grey boxes are simultaneously updated with the equation. You can enter the rest of
1995
 
                                                the equation in the same fashion.</para></listitem>
1996
 
                                                <listitem><para>Once you enter the complete equation using the
1997
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window, the equation appears as an
1998
 
                                                object in your document window and you can view the complete markup for the
1999
 
                                                equation in the equation editor. Exit the formula editor by clicking anywhere on
2000
 
                                                the document body.</para>
2001
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The Inserted Equation</emphasis></title>
2002
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
2003
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_094.png" format="PNG"/>
2004
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
2005
 
                                                        </figure>
2006
 
                                                </listitem>
2007
 
                                                <listitem><para>Once the formula is inserted in your document, you may want to
2008
 
                                                modify it further. To edit a formula right-click once on it and select
2009
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Edit</emphasis> from the short-cut menu.</para>
2010
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Editing Equation</emphasis></title>
2011
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
2012
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_095.png" format="PNG"/>
2013
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
2014
 
                                                        </figure>
2015
 
                                                </listitem>
2016
 
                                                <listitem><para>Now you can insert new symbols into your formula or delete ones you no longer need.</para>
2017
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting New Symbols</emphasis></title>
2018
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
2019
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_096.png" format="PNG"/>
2020
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
2021
 
                                                        </figure>
2022
 
                                                </listitem>
2023
 
                                                <listitem><para>Though Greek characters are widely used in mathematical formulae,
2024
 
                                                especially geometric formulae, these characters are not available in either the
2025
 
                                                Selection window or the Context menu.</para></listitem>
2026
 
                                                <listitem><para>You can enter Greek characters by typing the markup language for
2027
 
                                                them in the equation editor. Alternatively, you can use the
2028
 
                                                <emphasis role="strong">Catalog</emphasis> window. To display the Catalog window, on
2029
 
                                                the Tools menu, click Catalog.</para>
2030
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Launching the Catalogue Window</emphasis></title>
2031
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
2032
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_097.png" format="PNG"/>
2033
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
2034
 
                                                        </figure>
2035
 
                                                </listitem>
2036
 
                                                <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Symbols</emphasis> dialogue box is displayed.
2037
 
                                                Before selecting a character, ensure that <emphasis role="strong">Greek</emphasis> is
2038
 
                                                selected under the <emphasis role="strong">Symbol</emphasis> set drop-down window.
2039
 
                                                Select the required Greek character from the <emphasis role="strong">Symbols</emphasis>
2040
 
                                                window and click <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis>.</para>
2041
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting Greek Symbols</emphasis></title>
2042
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
2043
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_098.png" format="PNG"/>
2044
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
2045
 
                                                        </figure>
2046
 
                                                </listitem>
2047
 
                                                <listitem><para>The character is inserted into your document and the markup is displayed
2048
 
                                                in the equation editor. You can continue entering formulas into your document following
2049
 
                                                the same procedure. Once you have entered all the required formulae, your document may
2050
 
                                                appear like this:</para>
2051
 
                                                        <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Final Equations</emphasis></title>
2052
 
                                                                <mediaobject><imageobject>
2053
 
                                                                        <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_099.png" format="PNG"/>
2054
 
                                                                </imageobject></mediaobject>
2055
 
                                                        </figure>
2056
 
                                                </listitem>
2057
 
                                        </orderedlist>
2058
 
                                </para>
2059
 
                        </sect2>
2060
 
                </sect1>
2061
 
                <sect1>
2062
 
                        <title>Additional Applications</title>
2063
 
                        <sect2>
2064
 
                                <title>GnuCash Accounting</title>
2065
 
                                <para>GnuCash is an application that helps you track home or small business finances.
2066
 
                                Instead of tracking all your expenses on paper, you can use GnuCash to ensure that
2067
 
                                you don't lose any information at the end of the month. All details of income and expenditure
2068
 
                                can be managed with this utility. Using GnuCash, a small business can track its customers as
2069
 
                                well as its vendors by entering their details. You can also create a monthly
2070
 
                                profit/loss report for your business.</para>
2071
 
                                <para>GnuCash can store and manage the details of all your bank accounts in one place.
2072
 
                                GnuCash is based on double-entry bookkeeping (the sort that trained, professional accountants use) 
2073
 
                                to ensure balanced accounts and accurate reports.</para>
2074
 
                                <para>GnuCash is easy to use and can be tailored as per your needs.</para>
2075
 
                                <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">The GnuCash Accounting Application</emphasis></title>
2076
 
                                        <mediaobject><imageobject>
2077
 
                                                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_100.png" format="PNG"/>
2078
 
                                        </imageobject></mediaobject>
2079
 
                                </figure>
2080
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Key Features of the GnuCash Application</emphasis></para>
2081
 
                                <para>Using GnuCash is like filling your personal finance information in a register but in
2082
 
                                a more organised way. The following features make GnuCash a very useful, 
2083
 
                                powerful, yet flexible software programme:
2084
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
2085
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Easy-to-Use Interface:</emphasis> The
2086
 
                                                interface of GnuCash is as simple to use as keeping records on a piece of paper. It
2087
 
                                                also has a Quick-Fill feature, which means that as soon as you type a few characters,
2088
 
                                                GnuCash scans its list and completes the entry automatically. If you use an entry on
2089
 
                                                a regular basis, you don't need to type it every time.</para></listitem>
2090
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Double Entry System:</emphasis> Following the
2091
 
                                                principles of double-entry accounting, in GnuCash each transaction has to be mentioned in
2092
 
                                                two places -- debit in one account and credit in another. This means that the
2093
 
                                                difference between income and expenses exactly equals the sum of all assets and equity.
2094
 
                                                This will help you verify that you have entered the details of the income and expenses
2095
 
                                                accurately, which, in turn, will also help you track all expenses.</para></listitem>
2096
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Reports:</emphasis> You can generate a vast
2097
 
                                                range of reports using GnuCash. Home users can generate a Budget report, which will
2098
 
                                                give them a clear view of the income and expenses for the month. You can also generate
2099
 
                                                a Tax report for calculating tax based on tax-related income and expenses. A vast range
2100
 
                                                of Business reports, such as Customer and Vendor reports, can also be generated. Another
2101
 
                                                report that can be generated is the Assets and Liabilities report, which includes the
2102
 
                                                balance sheet.</para></listitem>
2103
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Multi-Currency Transaction Handling:</emphasis> 
2104
 
                                                You need not worry about transactions in different currencies; 
2105
 
                                                GnuCash automatically handles currency conversions.
2106
 
                                                In addition, GnuCash provides menus and pop-up windows in different languages.
2107
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2108
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">The Reconcile Window:</emphasis> GnuCash
2109
 
                                                provides the Reconcile window, which contains the balances of all your accounts. As
2110
 
                                                a result, you don't have to check the balances in various registers. Using this window,
2111
 
                                                you can easily validate bank statements.</para></listitem>
2112
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Split Transactions:</emphasis> The split
2113
 
                                                transaction feature allows you to split a transaction into multiple amounts and
2114
 
                                                categories. For example, you purchase a few things, which can be divided into different
2115
 
                                                categories, from a store. Here, the main transaction is the amount spent on the
2116
 
                                                purchase of these items, and the split transaction consists of the entries of all the
2117
 
                                                items on the split transaction editor screen. You can re-check the main transaction at
2118
 
                                                any time by simply displaying the split transaction entries.</para></listitem>
2119
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">HBCI Support:</emphasis> GnuCash also supports
2120
 
                                                the German Home Banking Computer Information (HBCI) protocol. This feature is useful for
2121
 
                                                German users who need not enter the details of their bank account manually. They can
2122
 
                                                directly perform online bank account transfers, download bank statements and make direct
2123
 
                                                debits.</para></listitem>
2124
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Scheduled Transactions:</emphasis> Users can
2125
 
                                                schedule transactions in GnuCash as per their requirements, and they can also set a
2126
 
                                                reminder for the transactions. This feature does not require you to remember which
2127
 
                                                transaction needs to run at what time. The software will automatically keep track
2128
 
                                                of the transaction and run the transaction at the scheduled time. You can also
2129
 
                                                re-schedule the transactions, when required.</para></listitem>
2130
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Transaction Finder:</emphasis> The Transaction
2131
 
                                                Finder dialogue box helps you locate even the smallest transaction. You can enter the
2132
 
                                                relevant fields in the Transaction Finder window, and GnuCash will find the
2133
 
                                                transaction for you. For example, you want to identify all expenses above a certain
2134
 
                                                amount this month. GnuCash will be able to identify these transactions. You need to
2135
 
                                                mention the transaction as greater than and the amount in the amount field.
2136
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2137
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">New User Manual and Help:</emphasis> GnuCash
2138
 
                                                provides a new Tutorial and Concepts guide to give an overview of the accounting
2139
 
                                                principles to new users. This helps the users apply the principles effectively and
2140
 
                                                gives them the exact procedure of each task.</para></listitem>
2141
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
2142
 
                                </para>
2143
 
                        </sect2>
2144
 
                        <sect2>
2145
 
                                <title>Scribus</title>
2146
 
                                <instructornote><title>Instructor Notes:</title>
2147
 
                                        <para><emphasis role="italic">Quickly illustrate the sections on Scribus and Evince.
2148
 
                                        Show where they can be found and provide an overview.</emphasis></para>
2149
 
                                </instructornote>
2150
 
                                <para>Scribus is a programme used to produce documents that cannot be created easily
2151
 
                                with a word processor. For example, you will not be able to use a word processor to create a poster 
2152
 
                                or a greeting card as the output will not be of professional print quality. Scribus enables easy alignment 
2153
 
                                of text and graphics, which is not a simple task using a word processor. Scribus makes it easy 
2154
 
                                to create PDF documents with professional features for commercial purposes; design brochures,
2155
 
                                newspapers, magazines, newsletters, posters and technical documentation.</para>
2156
 
                                
2157
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Key Features of Scribus</emphasis></para>
2158
 
                                <para>Use Scribus to design documents that have a great deal of graphical content. It 
2159
 
                                is an application that allows the users to position images, logos and so on at the appropriate
2160
 
                                place. 
2161
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
2162
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Updatable page templates:</emphasis> Scribus
2163
 
                                                provides page templates that contain common page properties, such as background,
2164
 
                                                header and footer.</para></listitem>
2165
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Style manager:</emphasis> Choose from a wide range of styling
2166
 
                                                options, including style inheritance for paragraphs, character styles and line styles. The style manager
2167
 
                                                gives you the advantage of viewing all the styling options at one place and makes it
2168
 
                                                easier to use the appropriate styling option at the right place.</para></listitem>
2169
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">XML-based file format:</emphasis> Scribus uses an
2170
 
                                                XML-based file format that is fully documented.</para></listitem>
2171
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Font-handling features:</emphasis> Scribus
2172
 
                                                includes a vast range of features for handling fonts. The features include rotating,
2173
 
                                                flipping and scaling text. Both Type1 and TrueType fonts are supported by Scribus, so
2174
 
                                                you can work on a document with any type of font.</para></listitem>
2175
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Image-handling features:</emphasis> Scribus imports
2176
 
                                                most common image formats, such as PNG, TIFF and JPEGs, so you can insert images of almost
2177
 
                                                all the common formats.</para></listitem>
2178
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
2179
 
                                </para>
2180
 
                                <para>In addition, Scribus supports:
2181
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
2182
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Unicode text and fonts:</emphasis> Scribus
2183
 
                                                imports most common text formats and supports Unicode text and fonts. It also supports
2184
 
                                                right-to-left scripts, such as Arabic and Hebrew. This helps you open a document for
2185
 
                                                page layout, without worrying about which font it is written in.</para></listitem>
2186
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Direct file imports:</emphasis> If you want to
2187
 
                                                add pictures and graphs to your document, you can use Draw, Impress and so on, and you
2188
 
                                                can directly import the file from that application to Scribus.</para></listitem>
2189
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">CMYK:</emphasis> Scribus supports Cyan, Magenta,
2190
 
                                                Yellow and Black (CMYK) layering, which is most important for professional use. Printing
2191
 
                                                is done in the four CMYK layers. Because of the CMYK feature, there will be minimal
2192
 
                                                difference between the on-screen and final printing. Scribus also provides enhanced
2193
 
                                                colour management functions.</para></listitem>
2194
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Functions related to PDF files:</emphasis> Even
2195
 
                                                if your file is in PDF, you can export these files easily to Scribus. You can also add
2196
 
                                                effects to these files and encrypt them. In addition, you can include keywords in an
2197
 
                                                exported PDF file.</para></listitem>
2198
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Vector formats:</emphasis> Scribus imports all
2199
 
                                                the important vector formats, including Adobe Illustrator (AI), Encapsulated PostScript
2200
 
                                                (EPS) EPS and Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG), so that you can open any vector graphic
2201
 
                                                in Scribus effortlessly.</para></listitem>
2202
 
                                        </itemizedlist>
2203
 
                                </para>
2204
 
                        </sect2>
2205
 
                        <sect2>
2206
 
                                <title>Evince</title>
2207
 
                                <para>Evince is a document viewer in Ubuntu. It supports multiple document formats, such as
2208
 
                                Portable Document Format (PDF), PostScript, djvu, tiff and dvi. This viewer makes reading
2209
 
                                documents a simple and hassle-free experience and has intuitive preview, index and search
2210
 
                                capabilities. You can also view documents in full-screen or presentation format, where
2211
 
                                each page is displayed like a slide in a slideshow.</para>
2212
 
                                <para>Because Evince can support multiple document formats, it can replace the various
2213
 
                                document viewers that were used previously to view the other document formats. Evince also
2214
 
                                supports multi-page formats.</para>
2215
 
                                <para>The following screenshot shows the main interface of Evince:</para>
2216
 
                                <figure><title><emphasis role="italic">Evince</emphasis></title>
2217
 
                                        <mediaobject><imageobject>
2218
 
                                                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_101.png" format="PNG"/>
2219
 
                                        </imageobject></mediaobject>
2220
 
                                </figure>
2221
 
                                <para><emphasis role="strong">Key Features of Evince</emphasis></para>
2222
 
                                <para>Some key features of Evince are described below:
2223
 
                                        <itemizedlist>
2224
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Enhanced search feature:</emphasis> Evince
2225
 
                                                has an enhanced and integrated search feature that displays the number of results
2226
 
                                                found and highlights the results on the page.</para></listitem>
2227
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Thumbnails:</emphasis> Using this feature, you need
2228
 
                                                not go through each page; you can quickly refer to the pages on the left sidebar of the window and
2229
 
                                                click any of the thumbnails to easily navigate to that page.</para></listitem>
2230
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Indexing:</emphasis> In the documents that
2231
 
                                                support indexing, Evince allows easy navigation by showing a document index. This
2232
 
                                                index allows you to move from one section to another.</para></listitem>
2233
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Zoom:</emphasis> Evince allows you to zoom
2234
 
                                                in and zoom out of the document. In addition, Evince remembers the zoom level of the
2235
 
                                                document after closing it. The next time you open the document, it opens at the same
2236
 
                                                zoom level.</para></listitem>
2237
 
                                                <listitem><para><emphasis role="strong">Selection:</emphasis> Select the text in a PDF document,
2238
 
                                                which is not possible in all other viewers.
2239
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2240
 
                                                </itemizedlist>
2241
 
                                </para>
2242
 
                        </sect2>
2243
 
                </sect1>
2244
 
                <sect1 id="lesson5-summary">
2245
 
                        <title>Lesson Summary</title>
2246
 
                        <para>In this lesson, you learned that:</para>
2247
 
                        <itemizedlist>
2248
 
                                <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org is the default office application suite provided with Ubuntu.</para></listitem>
2249
 
                                <listitem><para>The OpenOffice.org sofware suite comprises five applications to help you handle your work effectively.</para></listitem>
2250
 
                                <listitem><para>Writer forms the word processor component of the OpenOffice.org office software suite and contains all the features that you expect from a modern, fully equipped word processor.</para></listitem>
2251
 
                                <listitem><para>Calc forms the spreadsheet component of the OpenOffice.org office software suite and offers a whole range of advanced functions to help accomplish complex tasks.</para></listitem>
2252
 
                                <listitem><para>Impress is a fully featured presentation tool included in the OpenOffice.org office software suite.</para></listitem>
2253
 
                                <listitem><para>Math is the equation writer component of OpenOffice.org office software                                 suite.</para></listitem>                                
2254
 
                                <listitem><para>GnuCash is extremely useful application software for managing your home and/or small business finances.</para></listitem>
2255
 
                                <listitem><para>Scribus is a page layout application that you can use to create posters, cards, brochures and so on for commercial purposes.</para></listitem>
2256
 
                                <listitem><para>Evince is document viewer software that allows you to easily navigate a document. The document can also be viewed or searched.</para></listitem>
2257
 
                        </itemizedlist>
2258
 
                </sect1>
2259
 
                    <questions>
2260
 
                <sect1>
2261
 
                        <title>Review Exercise</title>
2262
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 1</emphasis></para>
2263
 
                        <para>List the applications included in the OpenOffice.org office software suite.</para>
2264
 
                        <answer>
2265
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 1</emphasis></para>
2266
 
                        <para>The applications included in the OpenOffice.org office software suite are:
2267
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2268
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Writer</para></listitem>
2269
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Calc</para></listitem>
2270
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Impress</para></listitem>
2271
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Draw</para></listitem>
2272
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Base</para></listitem>
2273
 
                                        <listitem><para>OpenOffice.org Math</para></listitem>
2274
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2275
 
                        </para>
2276
 
                        </answer>
2277
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 2</emphasis></para>
2278
 
                        <para>The applications in OpenOffice.org save files in which format, by default?</para>
2279
 
                        <para>a) SWF</para>
2280
 
                        <para>b) PDF</para>
2281
 
                        <para>c) ODF</para>
2282
 
                        <answer>
2283
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 2</emphasis></para>
2284
 
                        <para>c) OpenDocument Format (ODF)</para>
2285
 
                        </answer>
2286
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 3</emphasis></para>
2287
 
                        <para>Name the equation editor component of the OpenOffice.org software suite.</para>
2288
 
                        <answer>
2289
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 3</emphasis></para>
2290
 
                        <para>OpenOffice.org Math.</para>
2291
 
                        </answer>
2292
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 4</emphasis></para>
2293
 
                        <para>Which software feature help you create multiple personalised form letters?</para>
2294
 
                        <answer>
2295
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 4</emphasis></para>
2296
 
                        <para>The Mail merge feature in Writer allows you to create multiple personalised form
2297
 
                        letters, labels, envelopes, faxes, e-mail messages by using a form letter template and
2298
 
                        an address database.</para>
2299
 
                        </answer>
2300
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 5</emphasis></para>
2301
 
                        <para>Which software feature in available OpenOffice.org helps you navigate inside your
2302
 
                        document?</para>
2303
 
                        <answer>
2304
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 5</emphasis></para>
2305
 
                        <para>The Navigator feature available in OpenOffice.org provides you an outline view of
2306
 
                        your entire document and allows you to quickly navigate inside your document.</para>
2307
 
                        </answer>
2308
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 6</emphasis></para>
2309
 
                        <para>Name the feature in the Openoffice.org software suite that allows you to perform
2310
 
                        a complete document makeover?</para>
2311
 
                        <answer>
2312
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 6</emphasis></para>
2313
 
                        <para>The Style and Formatting window.</para>
2314
 
                        </answer>
2315
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 7</emphasis></para>
2316
 
                        <para>Do you require any additional software to convert a OpenOffice.org document into
2317
 
                        a PDF file?</para>
2318
 
                        <answer>
2319
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 7</emphasis></para>
2320
 
                        <para>The OpenOffice.org software suite allows you to save your document directly as a
2321
 
                        Portable Document Format (PDF) file without the use of any additional expensive
2322
 
                        software.</para>
2323
 
                        </answer>
2324
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 8</emphasis></para>
2325
 
                        <para>Name the software tool that guide you through the creation of a formula in
2326
 
                        OpenOffice.org Calc.</para>
2327
 
                        <answer>
2328
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 8</emphasis></para>
2329
 
                        <para>The Function Wizard</para>
2330
 
                        </answer>
2331
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 9</emphasis></para>
2332
 
                        <para>Math allows you to type your formula directly into the document if you are familiar
2333
 
                        with the_______________?</para>
2334
 
                        <answer>
2335
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 9</emphasis></para>
2336
 
                        <para>Math markup language</para>
2337
 
                        </answer>
2338
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 10</emphasis></para>
2339
 
                        <para>Name the feature available in OpenOffice.org Impress that allows you to create
2340
 
                        text</para>
2341
 
                        <para>with stunning 3D effects?</para>
2342
 
                        <answer>
2343
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 10</emphasis></para>
2344
 
                        <para>The Fontwork Gallery</para>
2345
 
                        </answer>
2346
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 11</emphasis></para>
2347
 
                        <para>Which feature of GnuCash helps you look for a transaction using a Query window?
2348
 
                        </para>
2349
 
                        <para>1. Split transaction</para>
2350
 
                        <para>2. Scheduled transaction</para>
2351
 
                        <para>3. Transaction finder</para>
2352
 
                        <para>4. Reconcile window</para>
2353
 
                        <answer>
2354
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 11</emphasis></para>
2355
 
                        <para>3. Transaction finder</para>
2356
 
                        </answer>
2357
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Question 12</emphasis></para>
2358
 
                        <para>What is Scribus?.</para>
2359
 
                        <para>a. An accounting application</para>
2360
 
                        <para>b. A word processor</para>
2361
 
                        <para>c. A document viewer</para>
2362
 
                        <para>d. Page layout software</para>
2363
 
                        <answer>
2364
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Answer 12</emphasis></para>
2365
 
                        <para>d)Page layout software</para>
2366
 
                        </answer>
2367
 
                </sect1>
2368
 
                    </questions>
2369
 
                <sect1>
2370
 
                        <title>Lab Exercises</title>
2371
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Exercise 1: Performing BasicWord Processing Tasks Using
2372
 
                        Writer</emphasis></para>
2373
 
                        <para>As an employee in an interior decorating company, you have been asked to prepare
2374
 
                        an chapter on interior decoration that would feature in the company's e-newlsetter.
2375
 
                        You have been quite upbeat about the assignment as it would showcase your abilities to
2376
 
                        the fore. However, you will have to prepare the chapter in the most aesthetically pleasing
2377
 
                        manner as possible. You plan to include lots of text, equally supported by some graphics
2378
 
                        and tables all aligned to live up to the highly aesthetic sensibilities of the company
2379
 
                        employees.</para>
2380
 
                        <para>To complete your assignment, you need to perform the following tasks:
2381
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2382
 
                                        <listitem><para>Create and format a text document</para></listitem>
2383
 
                                        <listitem><para>Insert tables in the document</para></listitem>
2384
 
                                        <listitem><para>insert images in the document</para></listitem>
2385
 
                                        <listitem><para>Save the document</para></listitem>
2386
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2387
 
                        </para>
2388
 
                        <para>To create and format a text document:
2389
 
                                <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
2390
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu,
2391
 
                                        point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
2392
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">OpenOffice.org Word Processor</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2393
 
                                        <listitem><para>Enter the required text in the blank document.</para></listitem>
2394
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click
2395
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> to display the
2396
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> window.</para></listitem>
2397
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis>
2398
 
                                        window, click a style category to reveal the various styles under that category.
2399
 
                                        </para></listitem>
2400
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select the text on which you want to apply the style and
2401
 
                                        formatting.</para></listitem>
2402
 
                                        <listitem><para>Double-click the desired style displayed in the
2403
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> window to apply it on
2404
 
                                        the selected text.</para></listitem>
2405
 
                                        <listitem><para>Repeat the same procedure to apply different styles and formatting
2406
 
                                        for different components of the document.</para>
2407
 
                                                <para>You have created and formatted your document according to your
2408
 
                                                requirements.</para></listitem>
2409
 
                                </orderedlist>
2410
 
                        </para>
2411
 
                        <para>To insert tables in the document:
2412
 
                                <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
2413
 
                                        <listitem><para>Position the cursor at the appropriate location in the document
2414
 
                                        where you want to insert the table.</para></listitem>
2415
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Table</emphasis> menu, point to
2416
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> and then click
2417
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Table</emphasis>
2418
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2419
 
                                        <listitem><para>Specify the table properties and click
2420
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2421
 
                                        <listitem><para>To display the <emphasis role="strong">Table Format
2422
 
                                        </emphasis> dialogue box, right-click the inserted table and select
2423
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Table</emphasis> from the short-cut menu.
2424
 
                                        </para></listitem>
2425
 
                                        <listitem><para>Define the table specifications per your requirements and
2426
 
                                        preferences in the <emphasis role="strong">Table Format</emphasis> dialogue box
2427
 
                                        and click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the changes.</para>
2428
 
                                                <para>You have successfully inserted tables in your text document. You can
2429
 
                                                now populate the tables with the required data.</para></listitem>
2430
 
                                </orderedlist>
2431
 
                        </para>
2432
 
                        <para>To insert images in the document:
2433
 
                                <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
2434
 
                                        <listitem><para>Position the cursor at the appropriate location in the document
2435
 
                                        where you want the picture to be inserted.</para></listitem>
2436
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, point to
2437
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Picture,</emphasis> then click <emphasis role="strong">From
2438
 
                                        File</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2439
 
                                        <listitem><para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Insert Picture</emphasis> dialogue
2440
 
                                        box, navigate to the desired file, select the file and then, click
2441
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Open.</emphasis>
2442
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2443
 
                                        <listitem><para>To resize the inserted image, select the image, then press and
2444
 
                                        hold the <emphasis role="strong">SHIFT</emphasis> key.</para></listitem>
2445
 
                                        <listitem><para>Holding down the <emphasis role="strong">SHIFT</emphasis> key,
2446
 
                                        click and drag one of the handles on the image to modify its size.</para></listitem>
2447
 
                                        <listitem><para>To arrange and align the image properly, right-click the image, then
2448
 
                                        select from the available options on the short-cut menu.</para></listitem>
2449
 
                                        <listitem><para>Define the appropriate positioning options for the image.</para></listitem>
2450
 
                                        <listitem><para>The image is now inserted properly into your text document.</para></listitem>
2451
 
                                </orderedlist>
2452
 
                        </para>
2453
 
                        <para>To save the document:
2454
 
                                <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
2455
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu click
2456
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Save As</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2457
 
                                        <listitem><para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Save</emphasis> dialogue box,
2458
 
                                        Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file.</para></listitem>
2459
 
                                        <listitem><para>Enter the file name in the <emphasis role="strong">Name
2460
 
                                        </emphasis> field.</para></listitem>
2461
 
                                        <listitem><para>Specify the file type by selecting from the drop-down menu
2462
 
                                        at the bottom of the dialogue box.</para></listitem>
2463
 
                                        <listitem><para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Save</emphasis> to save the
2464
 
                                        file.</para>
2465
 
                                                <para>You have successfully saved your document at the desired location.
2466
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2467
 
                                </orderedlist>
2468
 
                        </para>
2469
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Exercise 2: Performing Basic Spreadsheet Tasks Using
2470
 
                        Calc</emphasis></para>
2471
 
                        <para>As the accounts manager for your company, you are assigned with the task of
2472
 
                        preparing the quarterly accounts report for the company. You have been suddenly
2473
 
                        burdened with the task of collating a huge amount of data, analyzing the data to
2474
 
                        derive the required reports, present the data before the management and generate
2475
 
                        the reports in PDF format for documentation and future reference. In order to
2476
 
                        accomplish this feat, you shall have to perform the following tasks:
2477
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2478
 
                                        <listitem><para>Entering and format the data in a spreadsheet</para></listitem>
2479
 
                                        <listitem><para>Apply formulas and functions on the data</para></listitem>
2480
 
                                        <listitem><para>Present the data graphically</para></listitem>
2481
 
                                        <listitem><para>Generate the report in PDF format</para></listitem>
2482
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2483
 
                        </para>
2484
 
                        <para>To enter and format the data in a spreadsheet:
2485
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2486
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis>
2487
 
                                        menu, point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
2488
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">OpenOffice.org Spreadsheet</emphasis> to open a
2489
 
                                        Calc spreadsheet.</para></listitem>
2490
 
                                        <listitem><para>Enter the required data in the spreadsheet.</para></listitem>
2491
 
                                        <listitem><para>To apply desired formatting to a selected range of cells, on
2492
 
                                        the <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click
2493
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Cells.</emphasis>
2494
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2495
 
                                        <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Format Cells</emphasis> dialogue
2496
 
                                        box is displayed. Use the various options available under the
2497
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Font, Font Effects</emphasis> and
2498
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Alignment</emphasis> tabs to specify various formatting
2499
 
                                        attributes for the selected text.</para></listitem>
2500
 
                                        <listitem><para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Ok</emphasis> to apply the formatting
2501
 
                                        effects.</para></listitem>
2502
 
                                        <listitem><para>To apply Autoformat to a sheet or selected cell range, on the
2503
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis role="strong">
2504
 
                                        Autoformat.</emphasis>
2505
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2506
 
                                        <listitem><para>To assign a preset format to the selected cells, select one from the
2507
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> list and then click
2508
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the selected format on the selection.</para>
2509
 
                                                <para>You have successfully entered your data in a spreadsheet and applied the
2510
 
                                                desired formatting to it.</para></listitem>
2511
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2512
 
                        </para>
2513
 
                        <para>To apply formulas and functions on the data:
2514
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2515
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select the cell in your spreadsheet where you want the formula
2516
 
                                        to be inserted.</para></listitem>
2517
 
                                        <listitem><para>To create and apply a formula or function with the help of
2518
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis>, click
2519
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis> on the
2520
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Formula Bar</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2521
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select the desired function category from the
2522
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Category</emphasis> drop-down list to display the functions
2523
 
                                        listed under that specific category.</para></listitem>
2524
 
                                        <listitem><para>Find the desired function from the <emphasis role="strong">Functions
2525
 
                                        </emphasis> list and click it once to select it.</para></listitem>
2526
 
                                        <listitem><para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Next</emphasis> to proceed with the task
2527
 
                                        of entering a formula.</para></listitem>
2528
 
                                        <listitem><para>To specify the cell range on which you want to apply the formula,
2529
 
                                        click the <emphasis role="strong">Shrink</emphasis> button. This shrinks the
2530
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">FunctionWizard</emphasis> dialogue box and you are returned
2531
 
                                        to the main spreadsheet window.</para></listitem>
2532
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select the cell range containing the desired data.</para></listitem>
2533
 
                                        <listitem><para>After selecting the cells, go back to the Function Wizard by clicking
2534
 
                                        the <emphasis role="strong">Maximize</emphasis> button.</para></listitem>
2535
 
                                        <listitem><para>To complete the task of entering a formula, click
2536
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">OK.</emphasis>
2537
 
                                                </para>
2538
 
                                                <para>You have successfully applied a formula on the data. The solution appears
2539
 
                                                in the cell where you had applied the formula.</para></listitem>
2540
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2541
 
                        </para>
2542
 
                        <para>To present your data graphically:</para>
2543
 
                        <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, select
2544
 
                        <emphasis role="strong">Chart.</emphasis>
2545
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2546
 
                                        <listitem><para>Define the data range, the labels and the target sheet where the
2547
 
                                        chart would be displayed</para></listitem>
2548
 
                                        <listitem><para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Next</emphasis> to continue.
2549
 
                                        </para></listitem>
2550
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select the chart type and click
2551
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Next</emphasis> to continue with the procedure of
2552
 
                                        inserting charts.</para></listitem>
2553
 
                                        <listitem><para>Specify a variant for the selected graph type and click
2554
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Next</emphasis> to continue</para></listitem>
2555
 
                                        <listitem><para>Specify the main title for your chart and title and labels for
2556
 
                                        the axes. After specifying the required information, click
2557
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Create.</emphasis>
2558
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2559
 
                                        <listitem><para>A chart is inserted at the specified location in your spreadsheet.
2560
 
                                        You have successfully displayed your data in the form of a chart.</para></listitem>
2561
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2562
 
                        </para>
2563
 
                        <para>To generate a PDF file of the report:
2564
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2565
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
2566
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Export as PDF</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2567
 
                                        <listitem><para>Enter a file name in the <emphasis role="strong">Name</emphasis>
2568
 
                                        field on the <emphasis role="strong">Export</emphasis> dialogue box</para></listitem>
2569
 
                                        <listitem><para>Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file.</para></listitem>
2570
 
                                        <listitem><para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Save</emphasis> to continue.</para></listitem>
2571
 
                                        <listitem><para>Define the desired options on the
2572
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">PDF Options</emphasis> dialogue box, then click
2573
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">OK.</emphasis>
2574
 
                                                </para>
2575
 
                                                <para>You have successfully exported your spreadsheet as a PDF file.</para></listitem>
2576
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2577
 
                        </para>
2578
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Exercise 3: Creating Multimedia Presentation Using
2579
 
                        Impress</emphasis></para>
2580
 
                        <para>In your job profile as a trainer in an architecture firm, you are required to develop a
2581
 
                        presentation on architectural designs and plans, which shall be used as training material for
2582
 
                        the new joins. You want your training material to effectively demonstrate all the dimensional
2583
 
                        details of your architectural designs, which may include floor plans, elevations and siteplans.
2584
 
                        You would also like to infuse some life into your presentation by adding animations wherever
2585
 
                        required. Finally, you want to convert the presentation into a Flash file for easy future
2586
 
                        reference.</para>
2587
 
                        <para>To accomplish the task, you will need to:
2588
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2589
 
                                        <listitem><para>Create a presentation with the required text and images</para></listitem>
2590
 
                                        <listitem><para>Add 3D graphics and animations in the presentation</para></listitem>
2591
 
                                        <listitem><para>Configure and perform a slide show</para></listitem>
2592
 
                                        <listitem><para>Export the presentation as a Flash file</para></listitem>
2593
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2594
 
                        </para>
2595
 
                        <para>To create a presentation with the required text and images:
2596
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2597
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu, point
2598
 
                                        to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
2599
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">OpenOffice.org Presentation</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2600
 
                                        <listitem><para>The <emphasis role="strong">Presentation Wizard</emphasis> dialogue
2601
 
                                        box appears. To create a new blank presentation, retain the default selection and
2602
 
                                        click <emphasis role="strong">Next.</emphasis>
2603
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2604
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select the slide design and output medium for the presentation and
2605
 
                                        click <emphasis role="strong">Next.</emphasis>
2606
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2607
 
                                        <listitem><para>Define the transition effect to be applied on the slides and click
2608
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Create</emphasis> to proceed.</para></listitem>
2609
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select a layout for your current slide from the
2610
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Task</emphasis> pane on the left.</para></listitem>
2611
 
                                        <listitem><para>Enter the required text in the provided textboxes to create the
2612
 
                                        first slide, then click <emphasis role="strong">Master Pages</emphasis> to open the
2613
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Master Pages</emphasis> panel.</para></listitem>
2614
 
                                        <listitem><para>Click once on the template of your choice to apply it to your
2615
 
                                        presentation.</para></listitem>
2616
 
                                        <listitem><para>Insert a new slide by clicking the
2617
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Slide</emphasis> button on the
2618
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Standard toolbar</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2619
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select a layout for the new slide.</para></listitem>
2620
 
                                        <listitem><para>Enter the required text in the provided text box.</para></listitem>
2621
 
                                        <listitem><para>To insert a picture in the presentation, on the
2622
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, click
2623
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Picture.</emphasis>
2624
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2625
 
                                        <listitem><para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Insert Picture</emphasis>
2626
 
                                        dialogue box, select the desired image and click
2627
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Open</emphasis> to insert it.</para></listitem>
2628
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2629
 
                        </para>
2630
 
                        <para>Follow the same procedure to create the rest of the slides.</para>
2631
 
                        <para>You have successfully created a presentation with the required text and images.</para>
2632
 
                        <para>To add 3D graphics and animations:
2633
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2634
 
                                        <listitem><para>To render special 3D effects to a piece of text, on the
2635
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> toolbar, click the
2636
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork Gallery</emphasis> button.</para></listitem>
2637
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select the style in which you want the text to be displayed and click
2638
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">OK.</emphasis>
2639
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2640
 
                                        <listitem><para>Double-click the <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork</emphasis>
2641
 
                                        object.</para></listitem>
2642
 
                                        <listitem><para>Type the required text in place of the black '
2643
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork'</emphasis> that appears over the object.</para></listitem>
2644
 
                                        <listitem><para>Click once outside the object's selected area to exit the Fontwork
2645
 
                                        edit mode.</para></listitem>
2646
 
                                        <listitem><para>To display the <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects</emphasis> toolbar,
2647
 
                                        on the <emphasis role="strong">View</emphasis> menu, point to
2648
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Toolbars</emphasis> and then select
2649
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2650
 
                                        <listitem><para>To insert a <emphasis role="strong">3D-Object</emphasis> in your current
2651
 
                                        slide, click the desired object on the 3D-Objects toolbar.</para></listitem>
2652
 
                                        <listitem><para>Then move your mouse to the point where you want to insert the
2653
 
                                        object.</para></listitem>
2654
 
                                        <listitem><para>Holing down the left mouse button drag the mouse to insert the
2655
 
                                        object on the slide.</para></listitem>
2656
 
                                        <listitem><para>Change the proportion and size of the object by holding down the
2657
 
                                        green handles.</para></listitem>
2658
 
                                        <listitem><para>To apply 3D effects on the inserted graphic, right-click the object.
2659
 
                                        On the short-cut menu, click <emphasis role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2660
 
                                        <listitem><para>Define the look and feel of the inserted object by selecting
2661
 
                                        appropriate options in the <emphasis role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis> dialogue
2662
 
                                        box.</para></listitem>
2663
 
                                        <listitem><para>After defining the options, click the <emphasis role="strong">Assign
2664
 
                                        </emphasis> icon on top right of the <emphasis role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis>
2665
 
                                        dialogue box.</para></listitem>
2666
 
                                        <listitem><para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Close</emphasis> to exit the
2667
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis> dialogue box.</para></listitem>
2668
 
                                        <listitem><para>To add animations, to the various elements in your presentation, on the
2669
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> menu, click
2670
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Custom Animation</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
2671
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select an element and click the <emphasis role="strong">Add</emphasis>
2672
 
                                        button on the <emphasis role="strong">Custom Animation</emphasis> panel to display the
2673
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Custom Animation</emphasis> dialogue box.</para></listitem>
2674
 
                                        <listitem><para>After defining all the desired settings for the object, click
2675
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the animation effects.</para></listitem>
2676
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2677
 
                        </para>
2678
 
                        <para>Your have successfully added 3D graphics and animations in your presentation.
2679
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2680
 
                                        <listitem><para>To configure and perform a slide show:</para></listitem>
2681
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> menu, select
2682
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> Settings.</para></listitem>
2683
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select the desired options on the
2684
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> dialogue box and click
2685
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the settings.</para></listitem>
2686
 
                                        <listitem><para>To start the slide show, select
2687
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> from the Slide Show menu or press
2688
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">F5</emphasis>.</para>
2689
 
                                                <para>Your presentation runs as a lively slide show.</para></listitem>
2690
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2691
 
                        </para>
2692
 
                        <para>To export the presentation as a Flash file:
2693
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2694
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
2695
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Export.</emphasis>
2696
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2697
 
                                        <listitem><para>Specify a file name in the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis>
2698
 
                                        name field and navigate to the directory where you want to export the file.</para></listitem>
2699
 
                                        <listitem><para>To export the presentation as a
2700
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Flash</emphasis> file, select
2701
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Macromedia Flash (SWF) (.swf)</emphasis> from the
2702
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> format drop-down list.</para></listitem>
2703
 
                                        <listitem><para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Save</emphasis> to export the file
2704
 
                                        at the desired location.</para></listitem>
2705
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2706
 
                        </para>
2707
 
                        <para>The file is exported at the indicated location. You can now view the presentation as an
2708
 
                        SWF file.</para>
2709
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Exercise 4: Creating Formulae Using Math</emphasis></para>
2710
 
                        <para>In your role as a high school mathematics teacher, you need to create a mathematics
2711
 
                        test paper that also contains geometrical and arithmetical equations. You have to find a way
2712
 
                        to display the mathematical equations properly in the text document.</para>
2713
 
                        <para><emphasis role="strong">Solution:</emphasis>
2714
 
                                <itemizedlist>
2715
 
                                        <listitem><para>Position the cursor on the document where you want to insert the
2716
 
                                        formula.</para></listitem>
2717
 
                                        <listitem><para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, point to
2718
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Object</emphasis> and then click
2719
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Formula.</emphasis> The
2720
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Equation editor</emphasis> appears at the bottom of the
2721
 
                                        document window.</para></listitem>
2722
 
                                        <listitem><para>To display the <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window,
2723
 
                                        on the <emphasis role="strong">View</emphasis> menu, click
2724
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Selection.</emphasis>
2725
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2726
 
                                        <listitem><para>Start inserting the formula by selecting a symbol from the
2727
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window.</para></listitem>
2728
 
                                        <listitem><para>Enter the required text in the placeholders that appear in the
2729
 
                                        equation editor.</para></listitem>
2730
 
                                        <listitem><para>Follow the same procedure to enter the rest of the equation.</para></listitem>
2731
 
                                        <listitem><para>Click anywhere on the document body to exit the equation editor.</para></listitem>
2732
 
                                        <listitem><para>To insert some formulas containing Greek characters, display the
2733
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Catalog</emphasis> window by selecting it from the
2734
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Tools</emphasis> menu.</para></listitem>
2735
 
                                        <listitem><para>Ensure that <emphasis role="strong">Greek</emphasis>
2736
 
                                        is selected under the <emphasis role="strong">Symbol</emphasis> set drop-down
2737
 
                                        window.</para></listitem>
2738
 
                                        <listitem><para>Select the required Greek symbol from the
2739
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Symbols</emphasis> window and click
2740
 
                                        <emphasis role="strong">Insert.</emphasis>
2741
 
                                                </para></listitem>
2742
 
                                        <listitem><para>Follow the same procedure to enter the rest of the formula.</para></listitem>
2743
 
                                </itemizedlist>
2744
 
                        </para>
2745
 
                </sect1>
2746
 
</chapter>
 
5
  <title>Using OpenOffice Applications</title>
 
6
 
 
7
  <formalpara>
 
8
    <title>Objectives</title>
 
9
 
 
10
    <para>In this lesson, you will learn how to:</para>
 
11
  </formalpara>
 
12
 
 
13
  <itemizedlist>
 
14
    <listitem>
 
15
      <para>Perform basic word-processing functions using OpenOffice.org
 
16
      Writer.</para>
 
17
    </listitem>
 
18
 
 
19
    <listitem>
 
20
      <para>Perform basic spreadsheet functions using OpenOffice.org
 
21
      Calc.</para>
 
22
    </listitem>
 
23
 
 
24
    <listitem>
 
25
      <para>Create and view multimedia presentations using OpenOffice.org
 
26
      Impress.</para>
 
27
    </listitem>
 
28
 
 
29
    <listitem>
 
30
      <para>Perform basic drawing operations using OpenOffice.org Draw.</para>
 
31
    </listitem>
 
32
 
 
33
    <listitem>
 
34
      <para>Create and edit formulae using OpenOffice.org Math.</para>
 
35
    </listitem>
 
36
  </itemizedlist>
 
37
 
 
38
  <note userlevel="instructor">
 
39
    <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
40
 
 
41
    <para><emphasis role="italic">It is recommended to cover all the topics in
 
42
    this lesson. However, if you are running short on time you can omit the
 
43
    following optional topics:</emphasis> <itemizedlist>
 
44
        <listitem>
 
45
          <para><emphasis role="italic">OpenOffice.org Draw</emphasis></para>
 
46
        </listitem>
 
47
 
 
48
        <listitem>
 
49
          <para><emphasis role="italic">OpenOffice.org Math</emphasis></para>
 
50
        </listitem>
 
51
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
52
 
 
53
    <para>Students, who are familiar with office applications, may want
 
54
    further exposure to these applications. However, ensure to conclude the
 
55
    lesson within the permitted time span.</para>
 
56
  </note>
 
57
 
 
58
  <sect1>
 
59
    <title>Introducing the OpenOffice.org Suite</title>
 
60
 
 
61
    <para>OpenOffice.org is the default office application suite provided with
 
62
    Ubuntu. This is a free, open source office software suite that comprises
 
63
    all the features normally expected in an office suite. It is not just a
 
64
    collection of separate software programmes; it has been designed as a
 
65
    complete office package, in which all applications have a similar look and
 
66
    feel and common tools.</para>
 
67
 
 
68
    <para>The OpenOffice.org suite is available in more than 30 languages and
 
69
    can run on many operating systems, including Linux, Microsoft Windows,
 
70
    Solaris and Mac OS X. It is also compatible with all other major office
 
71
    suites, including Microsoft Office, which makes it easy for you to create,
 
72
    open, save and exchange documents with friends and colleagues in Microsoft
 
73
    Office formats.</para>
 
74
 
 
75
    <para>Another key feature of the OpenOffice.org suite is that all the
 
76
    applications save in the OpenDocument format, which is the new
 
77
    international standard for office documents. This Extensible Markup
 
78
    Language (XML) based format enables you to access your data from any
 
79
    OpenDocument-compliant software.</para>
 
80
 
 
81
    <tip>
 
82
      <title>Nice to Know:</title>
 
83
 
 
84
      <para>For more information on the history and development of
 
85
      OpenOffice.org, please visit <ulink
 
86
      url="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Openoffice.org">http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Openoffice.org</ulink>.</para>
 
87
    </tip>
 
88
 
 
89
    <para>The OpenOffice.org software suite includes the following
 
90
    applications to help you handle your work effectively: <itemizedlist>
 
91
        <listitem>
 
92
          <para>OpenOffice.org Writer</para>
 
93
        </listitem>
 
94
 
 
95
        <listitem>
 
96
          <para>OpenOffice.org Calc</para>
 
97
        </listitem>
 
98
 
 
99
        <listitem>
 
100
          <para>OpenOffice.org Impress</para>
 
101
        </listitem>
 
102
 
 
103
        <listitem>
 
104
          <para>OpenOffice.org Base</para>
 
105
        </listitem>
 
106
 
 
107
        <listitem>
 
108
          <para>OpenOffice.org Draw</para>
 
109
        </listitem>
 
110
 
 
111
        <listitem>
 
112
          <para>OpenOffice.org Math</para>
 
113
        </listitem>
 
114
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
115
 
 
116
    <itemizedlist>
 
117
      <title>To access the OpenOffice.org suite:</title>
 
118
 
 
119
      <listitem>
 
120
        <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu,
 
121
        point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click the
 
122
        OpenOffice.org application you want.</para>
 
123
 
 
124
        <figure float="0">
 
125
          <title>Accessing OpenOffice.org</title>
 
126
 
 
127
          <mediaobject>
 
128
            <imageobject>
 
129
              <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_001.png" format="PNG"
 
130
                         width="11cm" />
 
131
            </imageobject>
 
132
          </mediaobject>
 
133
        </figure>
 
134
      </listitem>
 
135
    </itemizedlist>
 
136
 
 
137
    <sect2>
 
138
      <title>OpenOffice.org Writer</title>
 
139
 
 
140
      <para>Writer is the word processor of the OpenOffice.org suite. It
 
141
      provides powerful functions and tools to do anything from writing a
 
142
      small letter to creating an entire book that contains charts, graphics,
 
143
      images, tables and an index. Complex desktop publishing tasks, such as
 
144
      creating multicolumn newsletters and brochures are also on hand.</para>
 
145
    </sect2>
 
146
 
 
147
    <sect2>
 
148
      <title>OpenOffice.org Calc</title>
 
149
 
 
150
      <para>Calc is a powerful spreadsheet that contains all the tools
 
151
      necessary to calculate, analyse, summarise and present data in the form
 
152
      of reports or charts. It has a wide range of advanced functions such as
 
153
      entering complex formulae, pulling in external data and performing
 
154
      statistical analyses.</para>
 
155
    </sect2>
 
156
 
 
157
    <sect2>
 
158
      <title>OpenOffice.org Impress</title>
 
159
 
 
160
      <para>Impress is a presentation programme designed to create effective
 
161
      multimedia presentations. It provides a range of tools to create
 
162
      presentations with 2D and 3D graphics, clip art, graphics, special
 
163
      effects and animations.</para>
 
164
    </sect2>
 
165
 
 
166
    <sect2>
 
167
      <title>OpenOffice.org Base</title>
 
168
 
 
169
      <para>Base is a database programme used to store contact and account
 
170
      information, create and modify tables, forms, queries and reports.
 
171
      Accessing data stored in a wide variety of database file formats is also
 
172
      available. Base will not be covered in detail in this course. For more
 
173
      information on base, please refer to
 
174
      www.openoffice.org/product/base.html</para>
 
175
    </sect2>
 
176
 
 
177
    <sect2>
 
178
      <title>OpenOffice.org Draw</title>
 
179
 
 
180
      <para>Draw is a vector graphics editor that provides tools to create
 
181
      anything from simple graphics to dynamic 3D illustrations and special
 
182
      effects.</para>
 
183
    </sect2>
 
184
 
 
185
    <sect2>
 
186
      <title>OpenOffice.org Math</title>
 
187
 
 
188
      <para>You can use Math for creating and editing mathematical equations
 
189
      by using a graphic user interface or by directly typing the formula into
 
190
      the equation editor. The formula created in this manner can then be
 
191
      inserted into other OpenOffice.org programmes, such as Writer, Calc and
 
192
      Impress.</para>
 
193
 
 
194
      <note>
 
195
        <title>Note:</title>
 
196
 
 
197
        <para>Using a new OS and especially a new office application suite is
 
198
        not as daunting to pick up as you may think. With OpenOffice, most of
 
199
        the operations are very intuitive. Think of a new suite as moving to a
 
200
        new house; all your old cutlery, plates and dishes are in your kitchen
 
201
        cupboards, you just need to get used to the new kitchen
 
202
        arrangement!</para>
 
203
      </note>
 
204
    </sect2>
 
205
  </sect1>
 
206
 
 
207
  <sect1>
 
208
    <title>Using OpenOffice.org Writer</title>
 
209
 
 
210
    <sect2>
 
211
      <title>Key Features of OpenOffice.org Writer</title>
 
212
 
 
213
      <para>You may already be familiar with many of the features of this
 
214
      application so only a few of them are included here.</para>
 
215
 
 
216
      <formalpara>
 
217
        <title>Writing</title>
 
218
 
 
219
        <para>OpenOffice.org Writer offers a variety of useful features to
 
220
        help you create basic text documents as well as long and complex or
 
221
        multi-part documents that may include components such as
 
222
        bibliographies, reference tables and indexes. Some of these features
 
223
        are: <itemizedlist>
 
224
            <listitem>
 
225
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Spellchecker:</emphasis> The
 
226
              spellchecker feature facilitates error-free writing by enabling
 
227
              you to check your entire document, including the header, footer,
 
228
              index entries and footnotes, for spelling errors. It even allows
 
229
              you to identify a misspelled word from a specific selection of
 
230
              the document, lists suggested words for replacing the misspelled
 
231
              word and provides you the option to add a new word to the
 
232
              existing user dictionary.</para>
 
233
            </listitem>
 
234
 
 
235
            <listitem>
 
236
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Thesaurus:</emphasis> The
 
237
              thesaurus helps you enhance the quality of your writing and make
 
238
              it more effective by allowing you to find a more appropriate
 
239
              synonym for a selected word.</para>
 
240
            </listitem>
 
241
 
 
242
            <listitem>
 
243
              <para><emphasis role="strong"> Autocorrect:</emphasis>
 
244
              Autocorrect is a software function that enables you to reduce
 
245
              your typing effort by automatically correcting common spelling
 
246
              and typing errors. This feature also allows you to automatically
 
247
              apply correct formatting to the text or insert special
 
248
              characters by recognizing particular character usage.</para>
 
249
            </listitem>
 
250
 
 
251
            <listitem>
 
252
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Hyphenation:</emphasis> You can
 
253
              use the hyphenation feature to insert hyphens in words that are
 
254
              too long to fit at the end of a line. It searches the entire
 
255
              document and suggests hyphenation that you can either accept or
 
256
              reject.</para>
 
257
            </listitem>
 
258
 
 
259
            <listitem>
 
260
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Mail merge:</emphasis> The Mail
 
261
              merge feature allows you to create multiple personalised form
 
262
              letters, labels, envelopes, faxes and e-mail messages by using a
 
263
              form letter template and an address database.</para>
 
264
            </listitem>
 
265
          </itemizedlist></para>
 
266
      </formalpara>
 
267
 
 
268
      <formalpara>
 
269
        <title>Designing and Structuring</title>
 
270
 
 
271
        <para>OpenOffice.org enables you to design and structure your text
 
272
        document by using an assortment of features, including: <itemizedlist>
 
273
            <listitem>
 
274
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting
 
275
              window:</emphasis> The Style and Formatting window is one of the
 
276
              common features available in the OpenOffice. org package that
 
277
              can be used consistently in all the applications included in the
 
278
              package. You can use this window to create, assign and modify
 
279
              styles for paragraphs, lists, individual characters, frames and
 
280
              pages.</para>
 
281
            </listitem>
 
282
 
 
283
            <listitem>
 
284
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Navigator:</emphasis> Provides you
 
285
              with an outline view of the entire document and allows you to
 
286
              quickly navigate inside the document. You can also use Navigator
 
287
              to track the objects and elements that are already inserted and
 
288
              to insert new elements into the document.</para>
 
289
            </listitem>
 
290
 
 
291
            <listitem>
 
292
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Indexes and Tables:</emphasis>
 
293
              Enable you to insert an index, a table of contents or a
 
294
              bibliography reference in your text document. You can also
 
295
              customise the inserted tables and indexes by defining their
 
296
              structure and appearance.</para>
 
297
            </listitem>
 
298
          </itemizedlist></para>
 
299
      </formalpara>
 
300
 
 
301
      <formalpara>
 
302
        <title>Desktop Publishing</title>
 
303
 
 
304
        <para>The following features can help you create professionally styled
 
305
        documents, such as brochures, invitations and newsletters:
 
306
        <itemizedlist>
 
307
            <listitem>
 
308
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Text Frames:</emphasis> Acts as a
 
309
              container for text and graphics and can be placed anywhere in a
 
310
              document. You can also use these frames to apply a multi-column
 
311
              layout to your document and render a professional look and style
 
312
              to it.</para>
 
313
            </listitem>
 
314
 
 
315
            <listitem>
 
316
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Graphics:</emphasis> Allows you to
 
317
              insert a graphic object into your text document from a gallery,
 
318
              a file or any other OpenOffice.org application.</para>
 
319
            </listitem>
 
320
 
 
321
            <listitem>
 
322
              <para><emphasis role="strong"> Tables:</emphasis> OpenOffice.org
 
323
              Writer also enables you to create or insert a table into a text
 
324
              document.</para>
 
325
            </listitem>
 
326
          </itemizedlist></para>
 
327
      </formalpara>
 
328
 
 
329
      <formalpara>
 
330
        <title>Drawing</title>
 
331
 
 
332
        <para>The drawing functions make it easy for you to create many types
 
333
        of drawings and graphics directly in your text document. You can use
 
334
        the Drawing bar to add various shapes, lines, text and callouts to a
 
335
        current document.</para>
 
336
      </formalpara>
 
337
 
 
338
      <formalpara>
 
339
        <title>Drag and Drop</title>
 
340
 
 
341
        <para>This unique feature allows you to drag objects from one location
 
342
        to another in the same document, from one OpenOffice document to
 
343
        another and from the Gallery to your OpenOffice document.</para>
 
344
      </formalpara>
 
345
 
 
346
      <formalpara>
 
347
        <title>The Help Function</title>
 
348
 
 
349
        <para>This is a complete reference for your Writer.</para>
 
350
      </formalpara>
 
351
    </sect2>
 
352
 
 
353
    <sect2>
 
354
      <title>Performing Basic Word-Processing Tasks</title>
 
355
 
 
356
      <para>You can perform a number of word-processing tasks, such as
 
357
      writing, editing, formatting, reviewing and printing documents, using
 
358
      OpenOffice.org Writer. The word processor also allows you to use various
 
359
      templates, apply different styles to your document, control your page
 
360
      layout and insert, edit and create graphics inside your text document.
 
361
      Instructions to perform some of the basic word-processing tasks in
 
362
      Writer are described in the following sections.</para>
 
363
 
 
364
      <formalpara>
 
365
        <title>Entering and Formatting Text</title>
 
366
 
 
367
        <para>OpenOffice.org Writer is primarily used for writing and
 
368
        formatting text. You can enter text using your keyboard and then apply
 
369
        a variety of formats to the text, as per the document's
 
370
        requirements.</para>
 
371
      </formalpara>
 
372
 
 
373
      <procedure>
 
374
        <title>You can use the following steps to enter and format text using
 
375
        OpenOffice.org Writer:</title>
 
376
 
 
377
        <step performance="required">
 
378
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu,
 
379
          point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
 
380
          <emphasis role="strong">Openoffice.org Word Processor</emphasis>. A
 
381
          blank text document opens.</para>
 
382
 
 
383
          <figure float="0">
 
384
            <title>Launching Writer</title>
 
385
 
 
386
            <mediaobject>
 
387
              <imageobject>
 
388
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_002.png"
 
389
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
390
              </imageobject>
 
391
            </mediaobject>
 
392
          </figure>
 
393
        </step>
 
394
 
 
395
        <step performance="required">
 
396
          <para>Depending on what you want to do, you can either create a
 
397
          letter, memo, note or an entire novel from scratch, or you may start
 
398
          with a predefined template or sample that is suitable for your
 
399
          requirements.</para>
 
400
 
 
401
          <para>To access the templates and samples, on the <emphasis
 
402
          role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, point to <emphasis
 
403
          role="strong">New</emphasis> and then click <emphasis
 
404
          role="strong">Templates and Documents</emphasis>. Alternatively, you
 
405
          can press SHIFT+CTRL+N. The <emphasis role="strong">Templates and
 
406
          Documents</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
 
407
 
 
408
          <figure float="0">
 
409
            <title>Accessing Templates and Documents</title>
 
410
 
 
411
            <mediaobject>
 
412
              <imageobject>
 
413
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_003.png"
 
414
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
415
              </imageobject>
 
416
            </mediaobject>
 
417
          </figure>
 
418
        </step>
 
419
 
 
420
        <step performance="required">
 
421
          <para>You can view the various categories of available templates in
 
422
          the middle column of the Templates and Documents dialogue box. If
 
423
          you want to use a template to create your document, you can
 
424
          double-click a category. This will display the various templates
 
425
          associated with that category. Select a template of your choice and
 
426
          then start working on it.</para>
 
427
 
 
428
          <para>However, you may also decide to work with the default blank
 
429
          document. To continue working with the blank document, exit the
 
430
          <emphasis role="strong">Templates and Documents</emphasis> dialogue
 
431
          box by clicking <emphasis role="strong">Close</emphasis> in the
 
432
          top-right corner of the dialogue box.</para>
 
433
 
 
434
          <figure float="0">
 
435
            <title>Accessing Templates</title>
 
436
 
 
437
            <mediaobject>
 
438
              <imageobject>
 
439
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_004.png"
 
440
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
441
              </imageobject>
 
442
            </mediaobject>
 
443
          </figure>
 
444
 
 
445
          <note userlevel="instructor">
 
446
            <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
447
 
 
448
            <para><emphasis role="italic">If students need to know more about
 
449
            using samples and templates, you can tell them how to use various
 
450
            wizards, available under the File menu, to create user-defined
 
451
            templates, such as faxes and letters. These templates can later be
 
452
            used to create further documents.</emphasis></para>
 
453
          </note>
 
454
        </step>
 
455
 
 
456
        <step performance="required">
 
457
          <para>After you have created the document, you can use the various
 
458
          formatting features provided in Writer to change the text display or
 
459
          emphasise specific areas in your document. You can use the following
 
460
          options available on the <emphasis
 
461
          role="strong">Formatting</emphasis> toolbar to perform some of the
 
462
          most common formatting tasks.</para>
 
463
 
 
464
          <figure float="0">
 
465
            <title>The Formatting Toolbar</title>
 
466
 
 
467
            <mediaobject>
 
468
              <imageobject>
 
469
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_005.png"
 
470
                           format="PNG" width="12.2cm" />
 
471
              </imageobject>
 
472
            </mediaobject>
 
473
          </figure>
 
474
        </step>
 
475
 
 
476
        <step performance="required">
 
477
          <para>You can use the <emphasis role="strong">Style and
 
478
          Formatting</emphasis> window to perform a complete document
 
479
          makeover.</para>
 
480
 
 
481
          <para>To open the <emphasis role="strong">Style and
 
482
          Formatting</emphasis> window, on the <emphasis
 
483
          role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis
 
484
          role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis>. The <emphasis
 
485
          role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> window appears.</para>
 
486
 
 
487
          <figure float="0">
 
488
            <title>Accessing Style and Formatting Window</title>
 
489
 
 
490
            <mediaobject>
 
491
              <imageobject>
 
492
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_006.png"
 
493
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
494
              </imageobject>
 
495
            </mediaobject>
 
496
          </figure>
 
497
        </step>
 
498
 
 
499
        <step performance="required">
 
500
          <para>You can use this window to select and modify the existing
 
501
          style or create a new style. Clicking one of the icons below the
 
502
          title bar of the <emphasis role="strong">Style and
 
503
          Formatting</emphasis> window will display a list of styles in a
 
504
          particular category, such as a list or a paragraph.</para>
 
505
 
 
506
          <figure float="0">
 
507
            <title>The Style and Formatting Icons</title>
 
508
 
 
509
            <mediaobject>
 
510
              <imageobject>
 
511
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_007.png"
 
512
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
513
              </imageobject>
 
514
            </mediaobject>
 
515
          </figure>
 
516
        </step>
 
517
 
 
518
        <step performance="required">
 
519
          <para>By default, when you open the <emphasis role="strong">Style
 
520
          and Formatting</emphasis> window, the <emphasis
 
521
          role="strong">Paragraph</emphasis> <emphasis
 
522
          role="strong">Style</emphasis> icon is selected. All the styles
 
523
          listed in this category are displayed in the <emphasis
 
524
          role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> window. You can start
 
525
          restyling individual parts of the current document by selecting
 
526
          specific parts of the document and applying an existing style by
 
527
          double-clicking that style.</para>
 
528
 
 
529
          <figure float="0">
 
530
            <title>Applying a Style</title>
 
531
 
 
532
            <mediaobject>
 
533
              <imageobject>
 
534
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_008.png"
 
535
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
536
              </imageobject>
 
537
            </mediaobject>
 
538
          </figure>
 
539
        </step>
 
540
 
 
541
        <step performance="required">
 
542
          <para>However, if you want to modify an existing style, you can
 
543
          simply right-click that style and select <emphasis
 
544
          role="strong">Modify.</emphasis> This displays a new pop-up window.
 
545
          You can redefine almost all aspects of the selected style using the
 
546
          various options available under the different tabs.</para>
 
547
 
 
548
          <para>Modify the specifications of the selected style, and click
 
549
          <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the changes.</para>
 
550
 
 
551
          <figure float="0">
 
552
            <title>Modifying a Style</title>
 
553
 
 
554
            <mediaobject>
 
555
              <imageobject>
 
556
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_009.png"
 
557
                           format="PNG" width="8cm" />
 
558
              </imageobject>
 
559
            </mediaobject>
 
560
          </figure>
 
561
        </step>
 
562
 
 
563
        <step performance="required">
 
564
          <para>Double-click the modified style to reflect the changes in the
 
565
          selected text.</para>
 
566
 
 
567
          <figure float="0">
 
568
            <title>Applying the Modified Style</title>
 
569
 
 
570
            <mediaobject>
 
571
              <imageobject>
 
572
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_010.png"
 
573
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
574
              </imageobject>
 
575
            </mediaobject>
 
576
          </figure>
 
577
        </step>
 
578
 
 
579
        <step performance="required">
 
580
          <para>You can customize all other parts of the document in the same
 
581
          way.</para>
 
582
 
 
583
          <note userlevel="instructor">
 
584
            <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
585
 
 
586
            <para>If the students want to know more about the various
 
587
            formatting options available, you can give them the following
 
588
            information:</para>
 
589
 
 
590
            <para><emphasis role="italic">OpenOffice.org provides several ways
 
591
            to apply styles. These are:</emphasis> <itemizedlist>
 
592
                <listitem>
 
593
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">Using the Styles and
 
594
                  Formatting window.</emphasis></para>
 
595
                </listitem>
 
596
 
 
597
                <listitem>
 
598
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">Using Fill Format
 
599
                  mode.</emphasis></para>
 
600
                </listitem>
 
601
 
 
602
                <listitem>
 
603
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">Using the Apply Style list on
 
604
                  the Formatting bar.</emphasis></para>
 
605
                </listitem>
 
606
 
 
607
                <listitem>
 
608
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">Assigning styles to shortcut
 
609
                  keys.</emphasis></para>
 
610
                </listitem>
 
611
 
 
612
                <listitem>
 
613
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">Using
 
614
                  AutoFormat.</emphasis></para>
 
615
                </listitem>
 
616
              </itemizedlist></para>
 
617
 
 
618
            <para>In addition, describe the procedure to create a new style
 
619
            and add it to the Style and Formatting window.</para>
 
620
          </note>
 
621
        </step>
 
622
      </procedure>
 
623
 
 
624
      <procedure>
 
625
        <title>Inserting Tables</title>
 
626
 
 
627
        <para>To insert a table in a text document, position the cursor where
 
628
        you want the table to appear and then follow the procedure described
 
629
        below:</para>
 
630
 
 
631
        <step performance="required">
 
632
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Table</emphasis> menu, point to
 
633
          <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> and then click <emphasis
 
634
          role="strong">Table.</emphasis> The <emphasis role="strong">Insert
 
635
          Table</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
 
636
 
 
637
          <figure float="0">
 
638
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting a
 
639
            Table</emphasis></title>
 
640
 
 
641
            <mediaobject>
 
642
              <imageobject>
 
643
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_011.png"
 
644
                           format="PNG" width="6cm" />
 
645
              </imageobject>
 
646
            </mediaobject>
 
647
          </figure>
 
648
        </step>
 
649
 
 
650
        <step performance="required">
 
651
          <para>You can use the various options present in the dialogue box to
 
652
          specify some of the table properties.</para>
 
653
 
 
654
          <figure float="0">
 
655
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Specifying Table
 
656
            Properties</emphasis></title>
 
657
 
 
658
            <mediaobject>
 
659
              <imageobject>
 
660
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_012.png"
 
661
                           format="PNG" width="11.5cm" />
 
662
              </imageobject>
 
663
            </mediaobject>
 
664
          </figure>
 
665
 
 
666
          <tip>
 
667
            <title>Nice to Know:</title>
 
668
 
 
669
            <para>To directly insert a table with the default properties,
 
670
            click the Table icon on the Standard toolbar and select the table
 
671
            size in the graphic that appears. To create the table, click the
 
672
            cell that you want to be on the last row of the last
 
673
            column.</para>
 
674
          </tip>
 
675
        </step>
 
676
 
 
677
        <step performance="required">
 
678
          <para>Specify the table properties and click <emphasis
 
679
          role="strong">OK.</emphasis> The table is inserted at the specified
 
680
          location in your text document. By default, Writer creates a table
 
681
          as wide as the page margins, with all the rows having the same
 
682
          height and all the columns having the same width. To adjust the
 
683
          column and rows and customise the table further, right-click the
 
684
          table and select <emphasis role="strong">Table</emphasis> from the
 
685
          short-cut menu. The <emphasis role="strong">Table Format</emphasis>
 
686
          dialogue box opens.</para>
 
687
 
 
688
          <para>Now you can use this dialogue box to define finer
 
689
          specifications for the table such as alignment, column width, text
 
690
          flow, borders and background.</para>
 
691
 
 
692
          <para>Define the table specifications as per your requirements and
 
693
          preferences, and click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to
 
694
          apply the changes.</para>
 
695
 
 
696
          <figure float="0">
 
697
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Customising the Table
 
698
            Format</emphasis></title>
 
699
 
 
700
            <mediaobject>
 
701
              <imageobject>
 
702
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_013.png"
 
703
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
704
              </imageobject>
 
705
            </mediaobject>
 
706
          </figure>
 
707
        </step>
 
708
 
 
709
        <step performance="required">
 
710
          <para>The defined specifications are applied to the table. To
 
711
          arrange the data within one of the table cells into another table,
 
712
          you can create nested tables. Writer permits you to create as many
 
713
          layers of nested tables as you want.</para>
 
714
 
 
715
          <para>To create a nested table, click the cell in which you want the
 
716
          nested table to appear, then follow the procedure for inserting a
 
717
          new table. A nested table appears in the specified cell within the
 
718
          larger table.</para>
 
719
 
 
720
          <figure float="0">
 
721
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Creating a Nested
 
722
            Table</emphasis></title>
 
723
 
 
724
            <mediaobject>
 
725
              <imageobject>
 
726
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_014.png"
 
727
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
728
              </imageobject>
 
729
            </mediaobject>
 
730
          </figure>
 
731
        </step>
 
732
 
 
733
        <step performance="required">
 
734
          <para>You can now define the finer specifications of the nested
 
735
          table using the Table Format dialogue box and then populate the
 
736
          table with data.</para>
 
737
 
 
738
          <figure float="0">
 
739
            <title><emphasis role="italic">The Nested Table</emphasis></title>
 
740
 
 
741
            <mediaobject>
 
742
              <imageobject>
 
743
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_015.png"
 
744
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
745
              </imageobject>
 
746
            </mediaobject>
 
747
          </figure>
 
748
        </step>
 
749
      </procedure>
 
750
 
 
751
      <formalpara>
 
752
        <title>Inserting Images</title>
 
753
 
 
754
        <para>OpenOffice.org allows you to import images of various file
 
755
        formats, including the most common file types such as JPEG, PNG, BMP
 
756
        and GIF. Images can be inserted from a file, the OpenOffice.org
 
757
        Gallery, a scanner, the Internet, or a graphics programme.</para>
 
758
      </formalpara>
 
759
 
 
760
      <procedure>
 
761
        <title>To insert an image into your text document from a file:</title>
 
762
 
 
763
        <step performance="required">
 
764
          <para>Position the cursor at the location in the document where you
 
765
          want the picture to be inserted. On the <emphasis
 
766
          role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, point to <emphasis
 
767
          role="strong">Picture</emphasis> and then click <emphasis
 
768
          role="strong">From File</emphasis>. The <emphasis
 
769
          role="strong">Insert Picture</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
 
770
        </step>
 
771
 
 
772
        <step performance="required">
 
773
          <para>To insert the file, navigate to the desired file and select
 
774
          it. You can select the <emphasis role="strong">Preview</emphasis>
 
775
          check box at the bottom of the <emphasis role="strong">Insert
 
776
          Picture</emphasis> dialogue box to preview the selected image in a
 
777
          pane and verify whether you have selected the correct image. Click
 
778
          <emphasis role="strong">Open</emphasis> to insert the image in your
 
779
          document.</para>
 
780
 
 
781
          <figure float="0">
 
782
            <title>Inserting Image</title>
 
783
 
 
784
            <mediaobject>
 
785
              <imageobject>
 
786
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_016.png"
 
787
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
788
              </imageobject>
 
789
            </mediaobject>
 
790
          </figure>
 
791
 
 
792
          <note userlevel="instructor">
 
793
            <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
794
 
 
795
            <para>Explain the following:</para>
 
796
 
 
797
            <para><emphasis role="italic">Selecting the Link check box creates
 
798
            a link of the selected file inside your text document, instead of
 
799
            saving a copy of the image in your document. As a result, though
 
800
            you'll be able to view the image in the document, when the image
 
801
            is saved, the document will contain only a reference to that image
 
802
            but not the image itself. Linking an image has the following
 
803
            advantages and disadvantages:</emphasis> <itemizedlist>
 
804
                <listitem>
 
805
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">It reduces the size of your
 
806
                  document when it is saved because the image is not included
 
807
                  in it.</emphasis></para>
 
808
                </listitem>
 
809
 
 
810
                <listitem>
 
811
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">You can edit or modify the
 
812
                  image separately without making any changes in the document
 
813
                  and can view the modified image the next time you open the
 
814
                  document.</emphasis></para>
 
815
                </listitem>
 
816
 
 
817
                <listitem>
 
818
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">When you wish to send the
 
819
                  document to someone, you need to send both the document and
 
820
                  the image otherwise, the receiver will not be able to view
 
821
                  the linked image.</emphasis></para>
 
822
                </listitem>
 
823
              </itemizedlist></para>
 
824
          </note>
 
825
        </step>
 
826
 
 
827
        <step performance="required">
 
828
          <para>The image is inserted at the specified location in your
 
829
          document. If the image does not fit perfectly into your document,
 
830
          you should resize it.</para>
 
831
 
 
832
          <para>To resize the image while maintaining its proportions, select
 
833
          the image and then press and hold the SHIFT key. When you select an
 
834
          image, some square points (known as "handles") appear along its
 
835
          perimeter. While holding down the SHIFT key, click and drag one of
 
836
          the handles on the image to modify its size.</para>
 
837
 
 
838
          <figure float="0">
 
839
            <title>Resizing the Inserted Image</title>
 
840
 
 
841
            <mediaobject>
 
842
              <imageobject>
 
843
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_017.png"
 
844
                           format="PNG" width="12.5cm" />
 
845
              </imageobject>
 
846
            </mediaobject>
 
847
          </figure>
 
848
 
 
849
          <note userlevel="instructor">
 
850
            <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
851
 
 
852
            <para>Explain the difference between a scaled and an unscaled
 
853
            resize, and emphasise the advantages of the scaled resize
 
854
            performed above.</para>
 
855
          </note>
 
856
        </step>
 
857
 
 
858
        <step performance="required">
 
859
          <para>After you have resized the image, you need to position the
 
860
          image appropriately in the document. You can arrange and align
 
861
          images using the tools on the <emphasis role="strong">Frame
 
862
          toolbar</emphasis>, which appears below the <emphasis
 
863
          role="strong">Standard toolbar</emphasis> when you select a graphic
 
864
          for the first time.</para>
 
865
 
 
866
          <para>Alternatively, you can right-click the image and then select
 
867
          from the available options, such as <emphasis role="strong">Arrange,
 
868
          Wrap</emphasis> or <emphasis role="strong">Anchor,</emphasis> on the
 
869
          short-cut menu.</para>
 
870
 
 
871
          <figure float="0">
 
872
            <title>Positioning the Inserted Image</title>
 
873
 
 
874
            <mediaobject>
 
875
              <imageobject>
 
876
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_018.png"
 
877
                           format="PNG" width="10.5cm" />
 
878
              </imageobject>
 
879
            </mediaobject>
 
880
          </figure>
 
881
        </step>
 
882
 
 
883
        <step performance="required">
 
884
          <para>After you have selected appropriate positioning options for
 
885
          the image, you may obtain a result similar to the following
 
886
          screenshot.</para>
 
887
 
 
888
          <figure float="0">
 
889
            <title>The Inserted Image</title>
 
890
 
 
891
            <mediaobject>
 
892
              <imageobject>
 
893
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_019.png"
 
894
                           format="PNG" width="12cm" />
 
895
              </imageobject>
 
896
            </mediaobject>
 
897
          </figure>
 
898
        </step>
 
899
      </procedure>
 
900
 
 
901
      <procedure>
 
902
        <title>Printing Documents</title>
 
903
 
 
904
        <step performance="required">
 
905
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
 
906
          <emphasis role="strong">Print</emphasis>. The <emphasis
 
907
          role="strong">Print</emphasis> dialogue box opens. You can use this
 
908
          dialogue box to specify the printer to be used (in case you have
 
909
          more than one printer installed on your system), the pages to be
 
910
          printed, and the number of copies to be printed. You can also click
 
911
          the <emphasis role="strong">Properties</emphasis> button in the
 
912
          <emphasis role="strong">Print</emphasis> dialogue box to define the
 
913
          properties of the printer, such as orientation, the paper tray to be
 
914
          used and the paper size to be printed.</para>
 
915
 
 
916
          <para>To define printer options for the current document, click the
 
917
          <emphasis role="strong">Options</emphasis> button in the <emphasis
 
918
          role="strong">Print</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
 
919
 
 
920
          <figure float="0">
 
921
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Printing a
 
922
            Document</emphasis></title>
 
923
 
 
924
            <mediaobject>
 
925
              <imageobject>
 
926
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_020.png"
 
927
                           format="PNG" vendor="" width="10.5cm" />
 
928
              </imageobject>
 
929
            </mediaobject>
 
930
          </figure>
 
931
        </step>
 
932
 
 
933
        <step performance="required">
 
934
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Printer Options</emphasis>
 
935
          dialogue box enables you to select specific sections from the
 
936
          current document for printing. For example, to save toner or ink,
 
937
          you may not want to print the background and the graphics in the
 
938
          document. You can specify these details under the <emphasis
 
939
          role="strong">Content</emphasis> section by selecting or clearing
 
940
          the appropriate check boxes.</para>
 
941
 
 
942
          <para>Similarly, you can define the required printing options in the
 
943
          <emphasis role="strong">Pages</emphasis> and <emphasis
 
944
          role="strong">Notes</emphasis> section. After specifying the
 
945
          details, click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to save your
 
946
          settings.</para>
 
947
 
 
948
          <figure float="0">
 
949
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Defining Printer
 
950
            Options</emphasis></title>
 
951
 
 
952
            <mediaobject>
 
953
              <imageobject>
 
954
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_021.png"
 
955
                           format="PNG" width="9.6cm" />
 
956
              </imageobject>
 
957
            </mediaobject>
 
958
          </figure>
 
959
        </step>
 
960
 
 
961
        <step performance="required">
 
962
          <para>You can now start printing the document by clicking <emphasis
 
963
          role="strong">OK</emphasis> on the <emphasis
 
964
          role="strong">Print</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
 
965
 
 
966
          <note>
 
967
            <title>Note:</title>
 
968
 
 
969
            <para>Making changes in the Printer Options dialogue box will only
 
970
            apply to the current document and not change your default settings
 
971
            permanently.</para>
 
972
          </note>
 
973
 
 
974
          <note userlevel="instructor">
 
975
            <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
976
 
 
977
            <para><emphasis role="italic">If the students want to know about
 
978
            the procedure to select the default print options, provide them
 
979
            the following information:</emphasis></para>
 
980
 
 
981
            <para><emphasis role="italic">To select the default print options,
 
982
            On the Tools menu, click Options.</emphasis> <itemizedlist>
 
983
                <listitem>
 
984
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">The OpenOffice.org - Print
 
985
                  dialogue box opens.</emphasis></para>
 
986
                </listitem>
 
987
 
 
988
                <listitem>
 
989
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">In the left navigation panel,
 
990
                  expand OpenOffice.org Writer and then select
 
991
                  Print.</emphasis></para>
 
992
                </listitem>
 
993
 
 
994
                <listitem>
 
995
                  <para><emphasis role="italic">Select the required options
 
996
                  and click OK to apply the changes to the default print
 
997
                  settings.</emphasis></para>
 
998
                </listitem>
 
999
              </itemizedlist></para>
 
1000
          </note>
 
1001
        </step>
 
1002
      </procedure>
 
1003
 
 
1004
      <procedure>
 
1005
        <title>Saving Documents</title>
 
1006
 
 
1007
        <para>You can save your Writer document in the same way as you save
 
1008
        any other document. To save a new text document:</para>
 
1009
 
 
1010
        <step performance="required">
 
1011
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
 
1012
          <emphasis role="strong">Save As</emphasis>. The <emphasis
 
1013
          role="strong">Save</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
 
1014
 
 
1015
          <figure float="0">
 
1016
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Saving the
 
1017
            Document</emphasis></title>
 
1018
 
 
1019
            <mediaobject>
 
1020
              <imageobject>
 
1021
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_022.png"
 
1022
                           format="PNG" width="12cm" />
 
1023
              </imageobject>
 
1024
            </mediaobject>
 
1025
          </figure>
 
1026
        </step>
 
1027
 
 
1028
        <step performance="required">
 
1029
          <para>Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file,
 
1030
          enter the file name and click <emphasis
 
1031
          role="strong">Save</emphasis> to save the file at the desired
 
1032
          location.</para>
 
1033
 
 
1034
          <para>OpenOffice.org also allows you to save your document in a
 
1035
          number of other file formats, including Microsoft Word, Rich Text,
 
1036
          Star Writer and as an HTML document. This enables you to share your
 
1037
          documents with other people who use other office applications, such
 
1038
          as Office.</para>
 
1039
 
 
1040
          <para>If you would like to save your current document as a Word
 
1041
          file, select the appropriate type of Word format from the drop-down
 
1042
          menu at the bottom of the dialogue box. Then, click <emphasis
 
1043
          role="strong">Save</emphasis> to save the file as a Word
 
1044
          document.</para>
 
1045
 
 
1046
          <figure float="0">
 
1047
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Saving in Word
 
1048
            Format</emphasis></title>
 
1049
 
 
1050
            <mediaobject>
 
1051
              <imageobject>
 
1052
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_023.png"
 
1053
                           format="PNG" width="8cm" />
 
1054
              </imageobject>
 
1055
            </mediaobject>
 
1056
          </figure>
 
1057
        </step>
 
1058
      </procedure>
 
1059
    </sect2>
 
1060
  </sect1>
 
1061
 
 
1062
  <sect1>
 
1063
    <title>Using OpenOffice.org Calc</title>
 
1064
 
 
1065
    <para>Calc is the spreadsheet component of the OpenOffice.org office
 
1066
    software suite. The comprehensive range of advanced functions included in
 
1067
    Calc helps professionals accomplish complex tasks. At the same time, Calc
 
1068
    is user-friendly, which makes it easier for new users. This topic will
 
1069
    familiarise you with its key features and teach you how to perform some
 
1070
    basic spreadsheet functions.</para>
 
1071
 
 
1072
    <para>Similar to all other applications in the OpenOffice.org suite, Calc
 
1073
    allows you to save spreadsheets in OASIS OpenDocument (ODF) format. This
 
1074
    XML-based format enables you to access your spreadsheets from any
 
1075
    OpenDocument-compliant software. In addition, Calc allows you to save
 
1076
    spreadsheets directly as Portable Document Format (PDF) files without
 
1077
    using any additional software.</para>
 
1078
 
 
1079
    <sect2>
 
1080
      <title>Key Features of OpenOffice.org Calc</title>
 
1081
 
 
1082
      <para>Calc is a fully featured office application that includes all the
 
1083
      advanced analysis, charting and decision-making features that you expect
 
1084
      from a high-end spreadsheet. Some of the key features of OpenOffice.org
 
1085
      Calc are: <itemizedlist>
 
1086
          <listitem>
 
1087
            <formalpara>
 
1088
              <title>Calculation:</title>
 
1089
 
 
1090
              <para>OpenOffice.org Calc provides you with over 300 functions
 
1091
              for financial, logical, statistical, mathematical and banking
 
1092
              operations. This enables you to create formulae to perform
 
1093
              complex calculations on your data. In addition, Calc provides
 
1094
              you with Function wizard that guides you interactively through
 
1095
              the creation of formulae.</para>
 
1096
            </formalpara>
 
1097
 
 
1098
            <para>Another feature of OpenOffice.org Calc is that it allows you
 
1099
            to create natural language formulae using words such as sales -
 
1100
            costs.</para>
 
1101
          </listitem>
 
1102
 
 
1103
          <listitem>
 
1104
            <formalpara>
 
1105
              <title>Scenario Manager:</title>
 
1106
 
 
1107
              <para>Allows you to perform 'what-if' analyses and view the
 
1108
              result of changes made to any factor of the calculation. For
 
1109
              example, when performing a loan calculation, you can change the
 
1110
              period of the loan and can view the resulting calculations for
 
1111
              the loan-repayment amount or the interest rate.</para>
 
1112
            </formalpara>
 
1113
          </listitem>
 
1114
 
 
1115
          <listitem>
 
1116
            <formalpara>
 
1117
              <title>Data Pilot:</title>
 
1118
 
 
1119
              <para>Enables you to compare, combine and arrange large amounts
 
1120
              of data. It helps you pull in raw data from corporate databases,
 
1121
              cross-tabulate, summarise and convert the data into meaningful
 
1122
              information. You can use Data Pilot to create interactive
 
1123
              tables, which allows the data to be frequently arranged,
 
1124
              rearranged or summarised according to different points of
 
1125
              view.</para>
 
1126
            </formalpara>
 
1127
          </listitem>
 
1128
 
 
1129
          <listitem>
 
1130
            <formalpara>
 
1131
              <title>Dynamic Charts:</title>
 
1132
 
 
1133
              <para>As the name suggests, these charts update automatically as
 
1134
              the data in the spreadsheet changes.</para>
 
1135
            </formalpara>
 
1136
          </listitem>
 
1137
 
 
1138
          <listitem>
 
1139
            <formalpara>
 
1140
              <title>Opening and Saving Microsoft Files:</title>
 
1141
 
 
1142
              <para>Calc allows you to use your old Microsoft spreadsheets and
 
1143
              save your work in Microsoft Excel or a variety of other formats.
 
1144
              This facilitates the easy sharing of data with others using
 
1145
              Microsoft or similar applications.</para>
 
1146
            </formalpara>
 
1147
          </listitem>
 
1148
        </itemizedlist></para>
 
1149
    </sect2>
 
1150
 
 
1151
    <sect2>
 
1152
      <title>Performing Basic Spreadsheet Tasks</title>
 
1153
 
 
1154
      <para>Similar to any other spreadsheet application, Calc is used to
 
1155
      process numerical information or text in tabular form. It is primarily
 
1156
      used for tabulating numerical figures. It also allows you to sort and
 
1157
      manipulate data, apply arithmetic, mathematic and statistical functions
 
1158
      to data sets and represent the datasets in charts or graphical forms.
 
1159
      The following sections describe the instructions to perform some basic
 
1160
      spreadsheet tasks in Calc.</para>
 
1161
 
 
1162
      <procedure>
 
1163
        <title>Formatting Tables and Cells</title>
 
1164
 
 
1165
        <para>To format tables and cells in a Calc spreadsheet:</para>
 
1166
 
 
1167
        <step performance="required">
 
1168
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu,
 
1169
          point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
 
1170
          <emphasis role="strong">OpenOffice.org Spreadsheet</emphasis> to
 
1171
          open a Calc spreadsheet. A new Calc window opens.</para>
 
1172
 
 
1173
          <figure float="0">
 
1174
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Launching Calc</emphasis></title>
 
1175
 
 
1176
            <mediaobject>
 
1177
              <imageobject>
 
1178
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_024.png"
 
1179
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1180
              </imageobject>
 
1181
            </mediaobject>
 
1182
          </figure>
 
1183
        </step>
 
1184
 
 
1185
        <step performance="required">
 
1186
          <para>Some of the key components of the main Calc window are
 
1187
          described below:</para>
 
1188
 
 
1189
          <figure float="0">
 
1190
            <title><emphasis role="italic">The Calc Window</emphasis></title>
 
1191
 
 
1192
            <mediaobject>
 
1193
              <imageobject>
 
1194
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_025.png"
 
1195
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1196
              </imageobject>
 
1197
            </mediaobject>
 
1198
          </figure>
 
1199
 
 
1200
          <itemizedlist>
 
1201
            <listitem>
 
1202
              <para>The Name box contains the cell and the row number, called
 
1203
              the cell reference, of the current or active cell.</para>
 
1204
            </listitem>
 
1205
 
 
1206
            <listitem>
 
1207
              <para>The active cell indicates the selected cell currently in
 
1208
              use.</para>
 
1209
            </listitem>
 
1210
 
 
1211
            <listitem>
 
1212
              <para>The Function wizard opens the Function Wizard dialogue
 
1213
              box.</para>
 
1214
            </listitem>
 
1215
 
 
1216
            <listitem>
 
1217
              <para>The Sum button allows you to calculate the sum of the
 
1218
              numbers in the cells that are above the current cell.</para>
 
1219
            </listitem>
 
1220
 
 
1221
            <listitem>
 
1222
              <para>Clicking the Function button inserts an equals sign into
 
1223
              the current cell as well as in the input line, making it ready
 
1224
              to accept a formula.</para>
 
1225
            </listitem>
 
1226
 
 
1227
            <listitem>
 
1228
              <para>The sheet tabs at the bottom of the sheet indicate the
 
1229
              number of worksheets present in the current spreadsheet. By
 
1230
              default, a new spreadsheet includes three worksheets.</para>
 
1231
            </listitem>
 
1232
          </itemizedlist>
 
1233
        </step>
 
1234
 
 
1235
        <step performance="required">
 
1236
          <para>After you have entered the required data in the spreadsheet,
 
1237
          you can apply different formatting styles to it by selecting from
 
1238
          the wide range of options available in Calc. To apply desired
 
1239
          formatting to a selected range of cells, on the <emphasis
 
1240
          role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis
 
1241
          role="strong">Cells.</emphasis> The <emphasis role="strong">Format
 
1242
          Cells</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
 
1243
 
 
1244
          <figure float="0">
 
1245
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Formatting Cells</emphasis></title>
 
1246
 
 
1247
            <mediaobject>
 
1248
              <imageobject>
 
1249
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_026.png"
 
1250
                           format="PNG" vendor="" width="9.6cm" />
 
1251
              </imageobject>
 
1252
            </mediaobject>
 
1253
          </figure>
 
1254
        </step>
 
1255
 
 
1256
        <step performance="required">
 
1257
          <para>You can use the various options available under the <emphasis
 
1258
          role="strong">Font, Font Effects</emphasis> and <emphasis
 
1259
          role="strong">Alignment</emphasis> tabs to specify various
 
1260
          formatting attributes for the selected text. Similarly, for
 
1261
          assigning formatting attributes to numbers, you can select from a
 
1262
          number of pre-defined formats available on the <emphasis
 
1263
          role="strong">Numbers</emphasis> tab page or define a new one based
 
1264
          on your preferences.</para>
 
1265
 
 
1266
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Format Cells</emphasis> dialogue
 
1267
          box also provides you with options to add smart borders and vibrant
 
1268
          backgrounds to your spreadsheet. It also allows you to select a
 
1269
          background colour, from a spectrum of colours, for your otherwise
 
1270
          bland and dull spreadsheet.</para>
 
1271
 
 
1272
          <para>Define the specifications and click <emphasis
 
1273
          role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the formatting effects.</para>
 
1274
 
 
1275
          <figure float="0">
 
1276
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Defining Formatting
 
1277
            Attributes</emphasis></title>
 
1278
 
 
1279
            <mediaobject>
 
1280
              <imageobject>
 
1281
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_027.png"
 
1282
                           format="PNG" vendor="" width="9.2cm" />
 
1283
              </imageobject>
 
1284
            </mediaobject>
 
1285
          </figure>
 
1286
        </step>
 
1287
 
 
1288
        <step performance="required">
 
1289
          <para>After you have selected formatting attributes for the selected
 
1290
          cell range, you may get a result similar to this one.</para>
 
1291
 
 
1292
          <figure float="0">
 
1293
            <title><emphasis role="italic">The Formatted
 
1294
            Spreadsheet</emphasis></title>
 
1295
 
 
1296
            <mediaobject>
 
1297
              <imageobject>
 
1298
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_028.png"
 
1299
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
1300
              </imageobject>
 
1301
            </mediaobject>
 
1302
          </figure>
 
1303
        </step>
 
1304
 
 
1305
        <step performance="required">
 
1306
          <para>Calc provides you with another useful feature, called
 
1307
          <emphasis role="strong">Autoformat,</emphasis> which enables you to
 
1308
          create attractive and professional table designs without undergoing
 
1309
          the time-consuming process of selecting cell groups and assigning
 
1310
          different formats to them. The Autoformat feature allows you to
 
1311
          quickly apply preset formats to an entire sheet or a selected cell
 
1312
          range. To apply Autoformat to a sheet or selected cell range, on the
 
1313
          <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis
 
1314
          role="strong">Autoformat</emphasis>.</para>
 
1315
 
 
1316
          <figure float="0">
 
1317
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Using Autoformat</emphasis></title>
 
1318
 
 
1319
            <mediaobject>
 
1320
              <imageobject>
 
1321
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_029.png"
 
1322
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1323
              </imageobject>
 
1324
            </mediaobject>
 
1325
          </figure>
 
1326
        </step>
 
1327
 
 
1328
        <step performance="required">
 
1329
          <para>This displays the AutoFormat dialogue box. To assign a pre-set
 
1330
          format to the selected cells, select one from the <emphasis
 
1331
          role="strong">Format</emphasis> list and then click <emphasis
 
1332
          role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the selected format to the
 
1333
          selection.</para>
 
1334
 
 
1335
          <figure float="0">
 
1336
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a
 
1337
            Format</emphasis></title>
 
1338
 
 
1339
            <mediaobject>
 
1340
              <imageobject>
 
1341
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_030.png"
 
1342
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1343
              </imageobject>
 
1344
            </mediaobject>
 
1345
          </figure>
 
1346
        </step>
 
1347
 
 
1348
        <step performance="required">
 
1349
          <para>The format of your choice is immediately applied to the
 
1350
          selection, and you get an attractive and fully formatted table with
 
1351
          very little effort.</para>
 
1352
 
 
1353
          <figure float="0">
 
1354
            <title><emphasis role="italic">The Formatted
 
1355
            Table</emphasis></title>
 
1356
 
 
1357
            <mediaobject>
 
1358
              <imageobject>
 
1359
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_031.png"
 
1360
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
1361
              </imageobject>
 
1362
            </mediaobject>
 
1363
          </figure>
 
1364
        </step>
 
1365
      </procedure>
 
1366
 
 
1367
      <formalpara>
 
1368
        <title>Entering Values and Formulas</title>
 
1369
 
 
1370
        <para>A formula is a spreadsheet function, complete with arguments,
 
1371
        entered in a cell. All formulae begin with an equal sign and may
 
1372
        contain number, text and, in some cases, other data such as format
 
1373
        details. The formulae may also contain arithmetic operators, logic
 
1374
        operators or function starts.</para>
 
1375
      </formalpara>
 
1376
 
 
1377
      <table>
 
1378
        <blockinfo>
 
1379
          <abstract>
 
1380
            <para>This table lists some examples of OpenOffice.org
 
1381
            formulae:</para>
 
1382
          </abstract>
 
1383
        </blockinfo>
 
1384
 
 
1385
        <title>Calc Formulae</title>
 
1386
 
 
1387
        <tgroup cols="2">
 
1388
          <colspec align="left" colname="col1" colwidth="5cm" />
 
1389
 
 
1390
          <colspec align="left" colname="col2" colwidth="10cm" />
 
1391
 
 
1392
          <tbody>
 
1393
            <row>
 
1394
              <entry><para> <emphasis role="strong">Formulae</emphasis>
 
1395
              </para></entry>
 
1396
 
 
1397
              <entry><para> <emphasis role="strong">Description</emphasis>
 
1398
              </para></entry>
 
1399
            </row>
 
1400
 
 
1401
            <row>
 
1402
              <entry><para> <emphasis role="strong">=SUM(A1:A11)</emphasis>
 
1403
              </para></entry>
 
1404
 
 
1405
              <entry><para>Calculates the sum of the cells
 
1406
              A1:A11</para></entry>
 
1407
            </row>
 
1408
 
 
1409
            <row>
 
1410
              <entry><para> <emphasis role="strong">
 
1411
              =EFFECTIVE(5%;12)</emphasis> </para></entry>
 
1412
 
 
1413
              <entry><para>Calculates the effective interest for 5% annual
 
1414
              nominal interest with 12 payments a year</para></entry>
 
1415
            </row>
 
1416
 
 
1417
            <row>
 
1418
              <entry><para> <emphasis role="strong">=B1*B2</emphasis>
 
1419
              </para></entry>
 
1420
 
 
1421
              <entry><para>Displays the result of the multiplication of B1 and
 
1422
              B2</para></entry>
 
1423
            </row>
 
1424
 
 
1425
            <row>
 
1426
              <entry><para> <emphasis role="strong">
 
1427
              =C4-SUM(C10:C14)</emphasis> </para></entry>
 
1428
 
 
1429
              <entry><para>Calculates C4 minus the sum of cells C10 to
 
1430
              C14</para></entry>
 
1431
            </row>
 
1432
          </tbody>
 
1433
        </tgroup>
 
1434
      </table>
 
1435
 
 
1436
      <para>The quickest way to enter a formula is to type the formula either
 
1437
      in the cell where you want the result to display or in the Input Line on
 
1438
      the Formula bar. You can also use the Function wizard, which helps you
 
1439
      interactively create formulae.</para>
 
1440
 
 
1441
      <procedure>
 
1442
        <title>To enter a formula using the Function wizard:</title>
 
1443
 
 
1444
        <step performance="required">
 
1445
          <para>In your spreadsheet, select the cell where you want the
 
1446
          formula to be inserted. To allow the Function wizard to guide you
 
1447
          through the creation and application of a formula, on the <emphasis
 
1448
          role="strong">Formula bar</emphasis>, click <emphasis
 
1449
          role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis>. This opens the <emphasis
 
1450
          role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
 
1451
 
 
1452
          <figure float="0">
 
1453
            <title>Launching Function Wizard</title>
 
1454
 
 
1455
            <mediaobject>
 
1456
              <imageobject>
 
1457
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_032.png"
 
1458
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
1459
              </imageobject>
 
1460
            </mediaobject>
 
1461
          </figure>
 
1462
        </step>
 
1463
 
 
1464
        <step performance="required">
 
1465
          <para>You can see the entire range of functions listed in the
 
1466
          <emphasis role="strong">Functions</emphasis> list box. You can also
 
1467
          select one category from the Category drop-down list to display the
 
1468
          functions listed under that category. Find the desired function from
 
1469
          the <emphasis role="strong">Functions</emphasis> list, and click to
 
1470
          select it. You notice that the <emphasis role="strong">Function
 
1471
          Wizard</emphasis> dialogue box provides you some information about
 
1472
          the selected function to guide you through your selection. After
 
1473
          selecting the function, click <emphasis
 
1474
          role="strong">Next</emphasis> to proceed with the task of entering a
 
1475
          formula.</para>
 
1476
 
 
1477
          <figure float="0">
 
1478
            <title>Selecting a Function</title>
 
1479
 
 
1480
            <mediaobject>
 
1481
              <imageobject>
 
1482
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_033.png"
 
1483
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1484
              </imageobject>
 
1485
            </mediaobject>
 
1486
          </figure>
 
1487
        </step>
 
1488
 
 
1489
        <step performance="required">
 
1490
          <para>Now, you need to specify the numbers to which you want to
 
1491
          apply the formula. To select the numbers, you need to go back to the
 
1492
          worksheet.</para>
 
1493
 
 
1494
          <para>Click the <emphasis role="strong">Shrink</emphasis> button to
 
1495
          shrink this dialogue box and return to the worksheet.</para>
 
1496
 
 
1497
          <figure float="0">
 
1498
            <title>Shrinking the Function Wizard Dialogue Box</title>
 
1499
 
 
1500
            <mediaobject>
 
1501
              <imageobject>
 
1502
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_034.png"
 
1503
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1504
              </imageobject>
 
1505
            </mediaobject>
 
1506
          </figure>
 
1507
        </step>
 
1508
 
 
1509
        <step performance="required">
 
1510
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis>
 
1511
          dialogue box shrinks to allow you to view the worksheet. To select
 
1512
          the cell range, hold down the <emphasis
 
1513
          role="strong">SHIFT</emphasis> key and use the mouse to select the
 
1514
          cell range containing the desired numbers.</para>
 
1515
 
 
1516
          <para>After selecting the cells, you can go back to the Function
 
1517
          wizard by clicking the <emphasis role="strong">Maximize</emphasis>
 
1518
          button.</para>
 
1519
 
 
1520
          <figure float="0">
 
1521
            <title>Selecting the Cell Range</title>
 
1522
 
 
1523
            <mediaobject>
 
1524
              <imageobject>
 
1525
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_035.png"
 
1526
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
1527
              </imageobject>
 
1528
            </mediaobject>
 
1529
          </figure>
 
1530
        </step>
 
1531
 
 
1532
        <step performance="required">
 
1533
          <para>The cell reference for the selected cell range automatically
 
1534
          appears in the <emphasis role="strong">number 1</emphasis> box and
 
1535
          the applied formula, complete with arguments, appears in the
 
1536
          <emphasis role="strong">Formula</emphasis> box at the bottom of the
 
1537
          dialogue box. To complete the task of entering a formula, click
 
1538
          <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis>.</para>
 
1539
 
 
1540
          <figure float="0">
 
1541
            <title>Applying the Formula</title>
 
1542
 
 
1543
            <mediaobject>
 
1544
              <imageobject>
 
1545
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_036.png"
 
1546
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1547
              </imageobject>
 
1548
            </mediaobject>
 
1549
          </figure>
 
1550
        </step>
 
1551
 
 
1552
        <step performance="required">
 
1553
          <para>The solution appears in the cell where you had applied the
 
1554
          formula.</para>
 
1555
 
 
1556
          <figure float="0">
 
1557
            <title>Final Output</title>
 
1558
 
 
1559
            <mediaobject>
 
1560
              <imageobject>
 
1561
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_037.png"
 
1562
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
1563
              </imageobject>
 
1564
            </mediaobject>
 
1565
          </figure>
 
1566
        </step>
 
1567
      </procedure>
 
1568
 
 
1569
      <formalpara>
 
1570
        <title>Inserting Charts</title>
 
1571
 
 
1572
        <para>You can present your data in the form of charts or graphs to
 
1573
        compare your data series visually and view trends in the data. Calc
 
1574
        offers you a number of ways to represent spreadsheet data
 
1575
        graphically.</para>
 
1576
      </formalpara>
 
1577
 
 
1578
      <procedure>
 
1579
        <title>To insert a chart in your spreadsheet:</title>
 
1580
 
 
1581
        <step performance="required">
 
1582
          <para>Open a spreadsheet containing data and row and column
 
1583
          headings, and select the data to be included in the chart. Then, on
 
1584
          the <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, select <emphasis
 
1585
          role="strong">Chart</emphasis>. The <emphasis role="strong">Chart
 
1586
          Wizard</emphasis> dialogue box appears.</para>
 
1587
 
 
1588
          <figure float="0">
 
1589
            <title>Launching the Chart Wizard</title>
 
1590
 
 
1591
            <mediaobject>
 
1592
              <imageobject>
 
1593
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_038.png"
 
1594
                           format="PNG" width="10.4cm" />
 
1595
              </imageobject>
 
1596
            </mediaobject>
 
1597
          </figure>
 
1598
 
 
1599
          <note userlevel="instructor">
 
1600
            <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
1601
 
 
1602
            <para>Advise students about the alternate way to insert a chart
 
1603
            using the Insert Chart icon from the Standard toolbar.</para>
 
1604
          </note>
 
1605
        </step>
 
1606
 
 
1607
        <step performance="required">
 
1608
          <para>On the first page of the <emphasis role="strong">Chart
 
1609
          wizard</emphasis>, you can select the chart type and preview the
 
1610
          chart output. Calc allows you to select from a wide range of 2D and
 
1611
          3D charts. You may decide to follow the rest of the instructions of
 
1612
          the Chart Wizard by clicking <emphasis role="strong">Next</emphasis>
 
1613
          or you can click <emphasis role="strong">Finish</emphasis> to insert
 
1614
          a chart in your document.</para>
 
1615
 
 
1616
          <figure float="0">
 
1617
            <title>Selecting the Chart Type</title>
 
1618
 
 
1619
            <mediaobject>
 
1620
              <imageobject>
 
1621
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_039.png"
 
1622
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
1623
              </imageobject>
 
1624
            </mediaobject>
 
1625
          </figure>
 
1626
        </step>
 
1627
 
 
1628
        <step performance="required">
 
1629
          <para>The chart is inserted at the specified location in your
 
1630
          spreadsheet. You can now move and resize the chart and edit it
 
1631
          further to suit your requirements.</para>
 
1632
 
 
1633
          <figure float="0">
 
1634
            <title>The Inserted Chart</title>
 
1635
 
 
1636
            <mediaobject>
 
1637
              <imageobject>
 
1638
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_040.png"
 
1639
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
1640
              </imageobject>
 
1641
            </mediaobject>
 
1642
          </figure>
 
1643
        </step>
 
1644
      </procedure>
 
1645
 
 
1646
      <formalpara>
 
1647
        <title>Exporting Spreadsheets to PDF</title>
 
1648
 
 
1649
        <para>Like the other OpenOffice.org applications, you can export your
 
1650
        spreadsheets from Calc as PDF files. With OpenOffice.org you do not
 
1651
        need any additional third party software to convert your documents
 
1652
        into PDF format.</para>
 
1653
      </formalpara>
 
1654
 
 
1655
      <procedure>
 
1656
        <title>To export your spreadsheet as a PDF:</title>
 
1657
 
 
1658
        <step performance="required">
 
1659
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
 
1660
          <emphasis role="strong">Export as PDF</emphasis>. The <emphasis
 
1661
          role="strong">Export</emphasis> dialogue box appears.</para>
 
1662
 
 
1663
          <figure float="0">
 
1664
            <title>Exporting Spreadsheet as PDF</title>
 
1665
 
 
1666
            <mediaobject>
 
1667
              <imageobject>
 
1668
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_041.png"
 
1669
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1670
              </imageobject>
 
1671
            </mediaobject>
 
1672
          </figure>
 
1673
        </step>
 
1674
 
 
1675
        <step performance="required">
 
1676
          <para>The four tabbed pages in this dialogue box allow you to define
 
1677
          options, such as the pages to be included in the PDF, the type of
 
1678
          compression to be used and the level of security to be assigned to
 
1679
          the file. After defining these specifications, click <emphasis
 
1680
          role="strong">Export</emphasis> to continue.</para>
 
1681
 
 
1682
          <figure float="0">
 
1683
            <title>Defining PDF Options</title>
 
1684
 
 
1685
            <mediaobject>
 
1686
              <imageobject>
 
1687
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_042.png"
 
1688
                           format="PNG" width="6cm" />
 
1689
              </imageobject>
 
1690
            </mediaobject>
 
1691
          </figure>
 
1692
        </step>
 
1693
 
 
1694
        <step performance="required">
 
1695
          <para>Provide a file name for your spreadsheet and navigate to the
 
1696
          directory where you want to save it. Click <emphasis
 
1697
          role="strong">Save</emphasis> to export the spreadsheet as a PDF
 
1698
          file.</para>
 
1699
 
 
1700
          <figure float="0">
 
1701
            <title>Saving as PDF</title>
 
1702
 
 
1703
            <mediaobject>
 
1704
              <imageobject>
 
1705
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_043.png"
 
1706
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1707
              </imageobject>
 
1708
            </mediaobject>
 
1709
          </figure>
 
1710
 
 
1711
          <tip>
 
1712
            <title>Nice to Know:</title>
 
1713
 
 
1714
            <para>To discover an Easter Egg tucked away in Calc, click within
 
1715
            any of the cells of your spreadsheet, type <emphasis
 
1716
            role="strong">= GAME("StarWars")</emphasis> and start playing
 
1717
            right away.</para>
 
1718
          </tip>
 
1719
        </step>
 
1720
 
 
1721
        <step performance="required">
 
1722
          <para>Your spreadsheet is now displayed as a PDF file.</para>
 
1723
 
 
1724
          <figure float="0">
 
1725
            <title>The PDF file</title>
 
1726
 
 
1727
            <mediaobject>
 
1728
              <imageobject>
 
1729
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_044.png"
 
1730
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1731
              </imageobject>
 
1732
            </mediaobject>
 
1733
          </figure>
 
1734
        </step>
 
1735
      </procedure>
 
1736
    </sect2>
 
1737
  </sect1>
 
1738
 
 
1739
  <sect1>
 
1740
    <title>Using OpenOffice.org Impress</title>
 
1741
 
 
1742
    <para>Impress is a fully featured presentation tool of the OpenOffice.org
 
1743
    office software suite. It enables you to create effective multimedia
 
1744
    presentations by creating 2D and 3D clip art and images. It also allows
 
1745
    you to create special effects and animations by using high-impact drawing
 
1746
    tools.</para>
 
1747
 
 
1748
    <para>OpenOffice.org Impress is similar to Microsoft PowerPoint in its
 
1749
    functionality. In addition to making it easy for you to create PDF files
 
1750
    from presentations, Impress lets you export the presentations into
 
1751
    ShockWave Flash (SWF) files. This enables you to run the output on any
 
1752
    computer that has a Flash player installed.</para>
 
1753
 
 
1754
    <sect2>
 
1755
      <title>Key Features of OpenOffice.org Impress</title>
 
1756
 
 
1757
      <para>Some of the many useful features of Impress are:</para>
 
1758
 
 
1759
      <formalpara>
 
1760
        <title>Creating Vector Graphics:</title>
 
1761
 
 
1762
        <para>Impress comes bundled with various drawing tools that allow you
 
1763
        to create vector graphics from within the application. You can also
 
1764
        export vector graphics to bitmap pictures and, inversely, convert
 
1765
        bitmap pictures into vector graphics.</para>
 
1766
      </formalpara>
 
1767
 
 
1768
      <formalpara>
 
1769
        <title>Creating Slides:</title>
 
1770
 
 
1771
        <para>Choose from ready-to-use templates or use the drawing and
 
1772
        diagram tools to jazz up your slides. Master view adds the elements
 
1773
        that you want to appear on all slides of your presentation.</para>
 
1774
      </formalpara>
 
1775
 
 
1776
      <para>Further, Impress users have the option to install the Open ClipArt
 
1777
      library, which contains a huge selection of images for free use.</para>
 
1778
 
 
1779
      <para>Animations and effects help add spice to your presentations. You
 
1780
      can render stunning 2D and 3D effects to your text using Fontwork, which
 
1781
      lets you create life-like 3D images easily.</para>
 
1782
 
 
1783
      <formalpara>
 
1784
        <title>Publishing Presentations:</title>
 
1785
 
 
1786
        <para>Impress allows you to publish presentations as handouts, export
 
1787
        them into PDF files, convert them into SWF files and publish them as
 
1788
        HTML documents. This enables you to access your presentation from a
 
1789
        variety of platforms.</para>
 
1790
      </formalpara>
 
1791
 
 
1792
      <formalpara>
 
1793
        <title>Saving Presentation in Other Formats:</title>
 
1794
 
 
1795
        <para>Similar to other OpenOffice.Org applications, Impress saves your
 
1796
        work in the international OpenDocument format. It also allows you to
 
1797
        save your work in other formats such as PowerPoint.</para>
 
1798
      </formalpara>
 
1799
    </sect2>
 
1800
 
 
1801
    <sect2>
 
1802
      <title>Creating Multi-Media Presentations</title>
 
1803
 
 
1804
      <procedure>
 
1805
        <title>Creating, Viewing and Printing a Presentation</title>
 
1806
 
 
1807
        <para>To create and view presentations using OpenOffice.org
 
1808
        Impress:</para>
 
1809
 
 
1810
        <step performance="required">
 
1811
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu,
 
1812
          point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
 
1813
          <emphasis role="strong">OpenOffice.org
 
1814
          Presentation</emphasis>.</para>
 
1815
 
 
1816
          <figure float="0">
 
1817
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Launching
 
1818
            Impress</emphasis></title>
 
1819
 
 
1820
            <mediaobject>
 
1821
              <imageobject>
 
1822
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_045.png"
 
1823
                           format="PNG" width="9cm" />
 
1824
              </imageobject>
 
1825
            </mediaobject>
 
1826
          </figure>
 
1827
        </step>
 
1828
 
 
1829
        <step performance="required">
 
1830
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Presentation Wizard</emphasis>
 
1831
          dialogue box appears. The <emphasis role="strong">Presentation
 
1832
          wizard</emphasis> allows you to define the basic structure of a
 
1833
          presentation in three brief steps. You can either continue defining
 
1834
          the specifications as guided by the Presentation Wizard or
 
1835
          immediately create a new blank presentation by clicking <emphasis
 
1836
          role="strong">Create</emphasis>.</para>
 
1837
 
 
1838
          <figure float="0">
 
1839
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Using the Presentation
 
1840
            Wizard</emphasis></title>
 
1841
 
 
1842
            <mediaobject>
 
1843
              <imageobject>
 
1844
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_046.png"
 
1845
                           format="PNG" width="12cm" />
 
1846
              </imageobject>
 
1847
            </mediaobject>
 
1848
          </figure>
 
1849
 
 
1850
          <tip>
 
1851
            <title>Nice to Know:</title>
 
1852
 
 
1853
            <para>To be able to preview the slide template, slide design and
 
1854
            slide transition effects, leave the Preview check box
 
1855
            selected.</para>
 
1856
          </tip>
 
1857
        </step>
 
1858
 
 
1859
        <step performance="required">
 
1860
          <para>This figure shows the main Impress window with an empty
 
1861
          presentation. From the <emphasis role="strong">Task</emphasis> pane
 
1862
          on the left, you can select a layout for your current slide.</para>
 
1863
 
 
1864
          <figure float="0">
 
1865
            <title><emphasis role="italic">The Impress
 
1866
            Window</emphasis></title>
 
1867
 
 
1868
            <mediaobject>
 
1869
              <imageobject>
 
1870
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_047.png"
 
1871
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1872
              </imageobject>
 
1873
            </mediaobject>
 
1874
          </figure>
 
1875
        </step>
 
1876
 
 
1877
        <step performance="required">
 
1878
          <para>Enter the required text in the provided text boxes to create
 
1879
          the first slide. To make your presentation more attractive and
 
1880
          professional looking, you can either change the background and
 
1881
          format the font size and colour for each slide or simply select a
 
1882
          pre-defined template from the <emphasis role="strong">Master
 
1883
          Pages</emphasis> panel.</para>
 
1884
 
 
1885
          <para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Master Pages</emphasis> to open
 
1886
          the <emphasis role="strong">Master Pages</emphasis> panel.</para>
 
1887
 
 
1888
          <figure float="0">
 
1889
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Opening the Master Pages
 
1890
            Panel</emphasis></title>
 
1891
 
 
1892
            <mediaobject>
 
1893
              <imageobject>
 
1894
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_048.png"
 
1895
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1896
              </imageobject>
 
1897
            </mediaobject>
 
1898
          </figure>
 
1899
        </step>
 
1900
 
 
1901
        <step performance="required">
 
1902
          <para>A number of templates are available on the <emphasis
 
1903
          role="strong">Master Pages</emphasis> panel. Select the template of
 
1904
          your choice to apply a whole new look to your presentation. You can
 
1905
          enhance the look of the presentation further by adding various
 
1906
          elements, such as objects, pictures and animated images, from the
 
1907
          <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu. Alternatively, you
 
1908
          can start adding new slides to the presentation.</para>
 
1909
 
 
1910
          <para>You can add a new slide by clicking the <emphasis
 
1911
          role="strong">Slide</emphasis> button on the <emphasis
 
1912
          role="strong">Standard toolbar</emphasis>. Alternatively, click
 
1913
          <emphasis role="strong">Slide</emphasis> on the <emphasis
 
1914
          role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu.</para>
 
1915
 
 
1916
          <figure float="0">
 
1917
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a Slide
 
1918
            Template</emphasis></title>
 
1919
 
 
1920
            <mediaobject>
 
1921
              <imageobject>
 
1922
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_049.png"
 
1923
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1924
              </imageobject>
 
1925
            </mediaobject>
 
1926
          </figure>
 
1927
        </step>
 
1928
 
 
1929
        <step performance="required">
 
1930
          <para>The inserted slide is also formatted as the first slide
 
1931
          because that is the layout you selected last. According to the
 
1932
          requirements of your presentation, you can select a new format from
 
1933
          the <emphasis role="strong">Layout</emphasis> pane. The new layout
 
1934
          has two columns, one for text and the other for images. This allows
 
1935
          you to display text along with an associated image on the same
 
1936
          slide. Enter the textual content in the provided text boxes, then
 
1937
          double-click the house icon to insert a graphic in the provided
 
1938
          placeholder.</para>
 
1939
 
 
1940
          <figure float="0">
 
1941
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a Slide
 
1942
            Layout</emphasis></title>
 
1943
 
 
1944
            <mediaobject>
 
1945
              <imageobject>
 
1946
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_050.png"
 
1947
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
1948
              </imageobject>
 
1949
            </mediaobject>
 
1950
          </figure>
 
1951
        </step>
 
1952
 
 
1953
        <step performance="required">
 
1954
          <para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Insert Picture</emphasis>
 
1955
          dialogue box, select the desired image and click <emphasis
 
1956
          role="strong">Open</emphasis> to insert it into your slide.</para>
 
1957
 
 
1958
          <figure float="0">
 
1959
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting Picture in a
 
1960
            Slide</emphasis></title>
 
1961
 
 
1962
            <mediaobject>
 
1963
              <imageobject>
 
1964
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_051.png"
 
1965
                           format="PNG" width="10cm" />
 
1966
              </imageobject>
 
1967
            </mediaobject>
 
1968
          </figure>
 
1969
        </step>
 
1970
 
 
1971
        <step performance="required">
 
1972
          <para>Notice that the inserted picture is automatically resized to
 
1973
          fit into the provided space. You can also insert an image by
 
1974
          selecting <emphasis role="strong">Picture</emphasis> from the
 
1975
          <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu. A picture inserted
 
1976
          in this way is not automatically resized, but you can move and
 
1977
          resize it as needed. You can insert new slides in a similar
 
1978
          fashion.</para>
 
1979
 
 
1980
          <para>Now, you are ready to display your presentation as a slide
 
1981
          show. To configure the basic slide show setting, select <emphasis
 
1982
          role="strong">Slide Show Settings</emphasis> from the <emphasis
 
1983
          role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> menu.</para>
 
1984
 
 
1985
          <figure float="0">
 
1986
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Setting up a Slide
 
1987
            Show</emphasis></title>
 
1988
 
 
1989
            <mediaobject>
 
1990
              <imageobject>
 
1991
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_052.png"
 
1992
                           format="PNG" width="10.5cm" />
 
1993
              </imageobject>
 
1994
            </mediaobject>
 
1995
          </figure>
 
1996
        </step>
 
1997
 
 
1998
        <step performance="required">
 
1999
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> dialogue box
 
2000
          helps you define the basic settings for your slide show. In the
 
2001
          <emphasis role="strong">Range</emphasis> section, you can specify
 
2002
          the slides to be included in the presentation and their order of
 
2003
          display. In the <emphasis role="strong">Type</emphasis> section, you
 
2004
          can define how to display the slides. Similarly, the <emphasis
 
2005
          role="strong">Options</emphasis> section allows you to define
 
2006
          various other settings for your presentation.</para>
 
2007
 
 
2008
          <para>After selecting the desired options, click <emphasis
 
2009
          role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the settings.</para>
 
2010
 
 
2011
          <figure float="0">
 
2012
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Configuring the Slide Show
 
2013
            Settings</emphasis></title>
 
2014
 
 
2015
            <mediaobject>
 
2016
              <imageobject>
 
2017
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_053.png"
 
2018
                           format="PNG" width="7.6cm" />
 
2019
              </imageobject>
 
2020
            </mediaobject>
 
2021
          </figure>
 
2022
        </step>
 
2023
 
 
2024
        <step performance="required">
 
2025
          <para>To start the slide show select <emphasis role="strong">Slide
 
2026
          Show</emphasis> from the <emphasis role="strong">Slide
 
2027
          Show</emphasis> menu or press <emphasis
 
2028
          role="strong">F5</emphasis>.</para>
 
2029
 
 
2030
          <figure float="0">
 
2031
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Starting the Slide
 
2032
            Show</emphasis></title>
 
2033
 
 
2034
            <mediaobject>
 
2035
              <imageobject>
 
2036
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_054.png"
 
2037
                           format="PNG" width="6.8cm" />
 
2038
              </imageobject>
 
2039
            </mediaobject>
 
2040
          </figure>
 
2041
        </step>
 
2042
 
 
2043
        <step performance="required">
 
2044
          <para>The presentation can be viewed as a running slide show. When
 
2045
          you reach the last slide of the presentation, you are prompted to
 
2046
          exit the presentation by clicking once. However, you can exit a
 
2047
          slide show at any point of time by pressing <emphasis
 
2048
          role="strong">ESC</emphasis>.</para>
 
2049
        </step>
 
2050
 
 
2051
        <step performance="required">
 
2052
          <para>You can choose to print your slides with notes, as an outline,
 
2053
          with page numbers, with date and time and so on. To do this, select
 
2054
          <emphasis role="strong">Print</emphasis> from the <emphasis
 
2055
          role="strong">File</emphasis> menu.</para>
 
2056
 
 
2057
          <figure float="0">
 
2058
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Printing the
 
2059
            Presentation</emphasis></title>
 
2060
 
 
2061
            <mediaobject>
 
2062
              <imageobject>
 
2063
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_055.png"
 
2064
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
2065
              </imageobject>
 
2066
            </mediaobject>
 
2067
          </figure>
 
2068
        </step>
 
2069
 
 
2070
        <step performance="required">
 
2071
          <para>You can use the <emphasis role="strong">Print</emphasis>
 
2072
          dialogue box to further define printer settings or accept the
 
2073
          default settings, and click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to
 
2074
          start printing your presentation.</para>
 
2075
 
 
2076
          <figure float="0">
 
2077
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Defining Printer
 
2078
            Settings</emphasis></title>
 
2079
 
 
2080
            <mediaobject>
 
2081
              <imageobject>
 
2082
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_056.png"
 
2083
                           format="PNG" width="9cm" />
 
2084
              </imageobject>
 
2085
            </mediaobject>
 
2086
          </figure>
 
2087
        </step>
 
2088
      </procedure>
 
2089
 
 
2090
      <procedure>
 
2091
        <title>Animating Objects and 3D Objects</title>
 
2092
 
 
2093
        <para>To create a presentation with 3D effects and animations:</para>
 
2094
 
 
2095
        <step performance="required">
 
2096
          <para>Open a new presentation in which you want to use 3D graphics
 
2097
          and animations, and select a suitable template from the Master pages
 
2098
          panel. Now, you can start adding elements to your presentation to
 
2099
          spice it up. Begin with placing the title of your presentation on
 
2100
          the first slide.</para>
 
2101
 
 
2102
          <para>To create an eye-catching display for the title text, you can
 
2103
          use one of the many wonderful text tools available in Impress. One
 
2104
          of these is Fontwork, which enables you to create special 3D effects
 
2105
          to your text. To start using Fontwork, on the <emphasis
 
2106
          role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> toolbar, click the <emphasis
 
2107
          role="strong">Fontwork Gallery</emphasis> button. The <emphasis
 
2108
          role="strong">Fontwork Gallery</emphasis> window appears.</para>
 
2109
 
 
2110
          <figure float="0">
 
2111
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Opening Fontwork
 
2112
            Gallery</emphasis></title>
 
2113
 
 
2114
            <mediaobject>
 
2115
              <imageobject>
 
2116
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_057.png"
 
2117
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
2118
              </imageobject>
 
2119
            </mediaobject>
 
2120
          </figure>
 
2121
        </step>
 
2122
 
 
2123
        <step performance="required">
 
2124
          <para>Select the style in which you want the title text to be
 
2125
          displayed, and click <emphasis role="strong">OK.</emphasis></para>
 
2126
 
 
2127
          <figure float="0">
 
2128
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a Fontwork
 
2129
            Style</emphasis></title>
 
2130
 
 
2131
            <mediaobject>
 
2132
              <imageobject>
 
2133
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_058.png"
 
2134
                           format="PNG" width="8cm" />
 
2135
              </imageobject>
 
2136
            </mediaobject>
 
2137
          </figure>
 
2138
        </step>
 
2139
 
 
2140
        <step performance="required">
 
2141
          <para>The text <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork,</emphasis> in the
 
2142
          selected style, appears on the slide as an object. To display the
 
2143
          title text in place of the <emphasis
 
2144
          role="strong">Fontwork</emphasis> object, double-click the object
 
2145
          and type the title text in place of the black Fontwork that appears
 
2146
          over the object. Click outside the object's selected area to exit
 
2147
          the <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork</emphasis> edit mode.</para>
 
2148
 
 
2149
          <figure float="0">
 
2150
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Editing the Fontwork
 
2151
            Object</emphasis></title>
 
2152
 
 
2153
            <mediaobject>
 
2154
              <imageobject>
 
2155
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_059.png"
 
2156
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
2157
              </imageobject>
 
2158
            </mediaobject>
 
2159
          </figure>
 
2160
        </step>
 
2161
 
 
2162
        <step performance="required">
 
2163
          <para>You can go ahead and do the same on the other slides too by
 
2164
          inserting 3D images and animating them.</para>
 
2165
 
 
2166
          <figure float="0">
 
2167
            <title><emphasis role="italic">The 3D Text</emphasis></title>
 
2168
 
 
2169
            <mediaobject>
 
2170
              <imageobject>
 
2171
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_060.png"
 
2172
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
2173
              </imageobject>
 
2174
            </mediaobject>
 
2175
          </figure>
 
2176
        </step>
 
2177
 
 
2178
        <step performance="required">
 
2179
          <para>You can insert 3D graphic objects in your presentation from
 
2180
          the 3D-Objects toolbar. By default, this toolbar is not displayed on
 
2181
          the Drawing toolbar. To display the 3D-Objects toolbar, on the
 
2182
          <emphasis role="strong">View</emphasis> menu, point to <emphasis
 
2183
          role="strong">Toolbars</emphasis> and then click <emphasis
 
2184
          role="strong">3D-Objects</emphasis>.</para>
 
2185
 
 
2186
          <figure float="0">
 
2187
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting 3D
 
2188
            Graphics</emphasis></title>
 
2189
 
 
2190
            <mediaobject>
 
2191
              <imageobject>
 
2192
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_061.png"
 
2193
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
2194
              </imageobject>
 
2195
            </mediaobject>
 
2196
          </figure>
 
2197
 
 
2198
          <tip>
 
2199
            <title>Nice to Know:</title>
 
2200
 
 
2201
            <para>You can also display the 3D-Objects toolbar by clicking the
 
2202
            small arrow at the end of the Drawing toolbar and selecting it
 
2203
            from the Visible Buttons list.</para>
 
2204
          </tip>
 
2205
        </step>
 
2206
 
 
2207
        <step performance="required">
 
2208
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects toolbar</emphasis>
 
2209
          appears as a floating toolbar. If you do not like floating toolbars,
 
2210
          you can place it on one of the existing toolbars. To dock the
 
2211
          <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects toolbar</emphasis>, drag the
 
2212
          title bar of the toolbar to the desired location and release the
 
2213
          mouse button.</para>
 
2214
 
 
2215
          <figure float="0">
 
2216
            <title><emphasis role="italic">The 3D-Objects
 
2217
            Toolbar</emphasis></title>
 
2218
 
 
2219
            <mediaobject>
 
2220
              <imageobject>
 
2221
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_062.png"
 
2222
                           format="PNG" width="2cm" />
 
2223
              </imageobject>
 
2224
            </mediaobject>
 
2225
          </figure>
 
2226
        </step>
 
2227
 
 
2228
        <step performance="required">
 
2229
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects toolbar</emphasis> is
 
2230
          now attached to the <emphasis role="strong">Line and Filling
 
2231
          toolbar</emphasis>. You can pick up objects from this toolbar and
 
2232
          insert them into your slides. To insert a 3D Object on your current
 
2233
          slide, click the desired object on the 3 <emphasis
 
2234
          role="strong">D-Objects toolbar</emphasis>. Then, move your mouse to
 
2235
          the point where you want to insert the object. You can see a plus
 
2236
          sign in place of the mouse tip. Holding down the left mouse button,
 
2237
          drag the mouse to insert the object on the slide. The selected 3D
 
2238
          object appears on the slide.</para>
 
2239
 
 
2240
          <figure float="0">
 
2241
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Inserting a 3D
 
2242
            Object</emphasis></title>
 
2243
 
 
2244
            <mediaobject>
 
2245
              <imageobject>
 
2246
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_063.png"
 
2247
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
2248
              </imageobject>
 
2249
            </mediaobject>
 
2250
          </figure>
 
2251
        </step>
 
2252
 
 
2253
        <step performance="required">
 
2254
          <para>You can change the proportion and size of the object by
 
2255
          holding the green handles that appear around it. Impress also
 
2256
          provides you tools to apply a number of 3D effects on the object to
 
2257
          modify its look and feel as per your requirements. To apply 3D
 
2258
          effects on the inserted graphic, right-click the object. On the
 
2259
          short-cut menu, click <emphasis role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis>.
 
2260
          The <emphasis role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis> dialogue box
 
2261
          opens.</para>
 
2262
 
 
2263
          <figure float="0">
 
2264
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Applying 3D
 
2265
            Effects</emphasis></title>
 
2266
 
 
2267
            <mediaobject>
 
2268
              <imageobject>
 
2269
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_064.png"
 
2270
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
2271
              </imageobject>
 
2272
            </mediaobject>
 
2273
          </figure>
 
2274
        </step>
 
2275
 
 
2276
        <step performance="required">
 
2277
          <para>You can use the options available under the different buttons
 
2278
          in this dialogue box to define the look and feel of the inserted
 
2279
          object. Click the <emphasis role="strong">Illumination</emphasis>
 
2280
          button to fine- tune the illumination effect on the object. You can
 
2281
          select the appropriate options from the drop-down lists to render
 
2282
          the desired illumination effect to the object. Alternatively, you
 
2283
          can simply drag the white dot in the graphic at the bottom of the
 
2284
          dialogue box and move it to get the desired effect.</para>
 
2285
        </step>
 
2286
 
 
2287
        <step performance="required">
 
2288
          <para>After specifying the desired options, click the <emphasis
 
2289
          role="strong">Assign</emphasis> icon on the top right of the
 
2290
          dialogue box to apply the effects on the selected object. Click
 
2291
          <emphasis role="strong">Close</emphasis> to exit the <emphasis
 
2292
          role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
 
2293
 
 
2294
          <figure float="0">
 
2295
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Defining 3D
 
2296
            Effects</emphasis></title>
 
2297
 
 
2298
            <mediaobject>
 
2299
              <imageobject>
 
2300
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_065.png"
 
2301
                           format="PNG" width="5cm" />
 
2302
              </imageobject>
 
2303
            </mediaobject>
 
2304
          </figure>
 
2305
 
 
2306
          <note userlevel="instructor">
 
2307
            <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
2308
 
 
2309
            <para><emphasis role="italic">If you have enough time, you can
 
2310
            also demonstrate the procedure of converting 2D objects into 3D
 
2311
            objects and applying the finer 3D effects to it.</emphasis></para>
 
2312
          </note>
 
2313
        </step>
 
2314
 
 
2315
        <step performance="required">
 
2316
          <para>Notice that with a couple of mouse clicks, the 3D object takes
 
2317
          on a completely new look. In a similar fashion, you can add many
 
2318
          more 3D and 2D elements to your presentation and apply various 3D
 
2319
          effects to jazz it up. Impress also offers some animation
 
2320
          functionality to help you bring life to your presentations. To
 
2321
          display the animation options available in Impress, on the <emphasis
 
2322
          role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis
 
2323
          role="strong">Custom Animation</emphasis>.</para>
 
2324
 
 
2325
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Custom Animations</emphasis> panel
 
2326
          now appears on the right edge of the presentation window.</para>
 
2327
 
 
2328
          <figure float="0">
 
2329
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Applying Custom
 
2330
            Animation</emphasis></title>
 
2331
 
 
2332
            <mediaobject>
 
2333
              <imageobject>
 
2334
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_066.png"
 
2335
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
2336
              </imageobject>
 
2337
            </mediaobject>
 
2338
          </figure>
 
2339
        </step>
 
2340
 
 
2341
        <step performance="required">
 
2342
          <para>To apply an animation effect on an individual element in your
 
2343
          slide, select that element and click the <emphasis role="strong">Add
 
2344
          </emphasis> button on the <emphasis role="strong">Custom
 
2345
          Animation</emphasis> panel. The Custom Animation dialogue box
 
2346
          opens.</para>
 
2347
 
 
2348
          <figure float="0">
 
2349
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Animating
 
2350
            Objects</emphasis></title>
 
2351
 
 
2352
            <mediaobject>
 
2353
              <imageobject>
 
2354
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_067.png"
 
2355
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
2356
              </imageobject>
 
2357
            </mediaobject>
 
2358
          </figure>
 
2359
        </step>
 
2360
 
 
2361
        <step performance="required">
 
2362
          <para>You can now apply various animations to the selected object,
 
2363
          define the entrance and exit animation for it and chart a motion
 
2364
          path for the object. Similarly, you can specify animation effects
 
2365
          for other elements on the slides.</para>
 
2366
 
 
2367
          <para>After defining all the desired settings for the object, click
 
2368
          <emphasis role="strong">OK </emphasis> to apply the animation
 
2369
          effects.</para>
 
2370
 
 
2371
          <figure float="0">
 
2372
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Customising Animation
 
2373
            Effects</emphasis></title>
 
2374
 
 
2375
            <mediaobject>
 
2376
              <imageobject>
 
2377
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_068.png"
 
2378
                           format="PNG" width="5cm" />
 
2379
              </imageobject>
 
2380
            </mediaobject>
 
2381
          </figure>
 
2382
        </step>
 
2383
 
 
2384
        <step performance="required">
 
2385
          <para>The specified animations can be viewed at the bottom of the
 
2386
          <emphasis role="strong">Custom Animations</emphasis> panel. You can
 
2387
          now view the animation effects in a slide show. Click the <emphasis
 
2388
          role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> button to view the presentation
 
2389
          as a slide show.</para>
 
2390
 
 
2391
          <figure float="0">
 
2392
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Launching a Slide
 
2393
            Show</emphasis></title>
 
2394
 
 
2395
            <mediaobject>
 
2396
              <imageobject>
 
2397
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_069.png"
 
2398
                           format="PNG" width="14cm" />
 
2399
              </imageobject>
 
2400
            </mediaobject>
 
2401
          </figure>
 
2402
        </step>
 
2403
 
 
2404
        <step performance="required">
 
2405
          <para>Your presentation runs as a spectacular and lively slide
 
2406
          show.</para>
 
2407
 
 
2408
          <figure float="0">
 
2409
            <title><emphasis role="italic">The spectacular Slide
 
2410
            Show</emphasis></title>
 
2411
 
 
2412
            <mediaobject>
 
2413
              <imageobject>
 
2414
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_070.png"
 
2415
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
2416
              </imageobject>
 
2417
            </mediaobject>
 
2418
          </figure>
 
2419
        </step>
 
2420
      </procedure>
 
2421
 
 
2422
      <formalpara>
 
2423
        <title>Exporting a Presentation</title>
 
2424
 
 
2425
        <para>As stated earlier, another useful feature associated with
 
2426
        Impress is that it has the built-in capacity to export presentations
 
2427
        directly into several other file formats. As a result, Impress allows
 
2428
        you to export your slide shows directly as Flash (SWF) files.</para>
 
2429
      </formalpara>
 
2430
 
 
2431
      <procedure>
 
2432
        <title>To export your presentation as an SWF file:</title>
 
2433
 
 
2434
        <step performance="required">
 
2435
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
 
2436
          <emphasis role="strong">Export.</emphasis> This opens the <emphasis
 
2437
          role="strong">Export</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
 
2438
 
 
2439
          <figure float="0">
 
2440
            <title>Exporting a Presentation</title>
 
2441
 
 
2442
            <mediaobject>
 
2443
              <imageobject>
 
2444
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_071.png"
 
2445
                           format="PNG" width="11.8cm" />
 
2446
              </imageobject>
 
2447
            </mediaobject>
 
2448
          </figure>
 
2449
        </step>
 
2450
 
 
2451
        <step performance="required">
 
2452
          <para>Here, you need to specify a file name in the <emphasis
 
2453
          role="strong">Name</emphasis> field and navigate to the directory
 
2454
          where you want to export the file. To export the presentation as a
 
2455
          Flash file, select <emphasis role="strong">Macromedia Flash (SWF)
 
2456
          (.swf)</emphasis> from the file type drop-down list and click
 
2457
          <emphasis role="strong">Save</emphasis>. The file is exported to the
 
2458
          indicated location. You can now view the presentation as a Flash
 
2459
          file.</para>
 
2460
 
 
2461
          <figure float="0">
 
2462
            <title>Exporting Presentation as a Flash File</title>
 
2463
 
 
2464
            <mediaobject>
 
2465
              <imageobject>
 
2466
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_072.png"
 
2467
                           format="PNG" width="9cm" />
 
2468
              </imageobject>
 
2469
            </mediaobject>
 
2470
          </figure>
 
2471
        </step>
 
2472
      </procedure>
 
2473
    </sect2>
 
2474
  </sect1>
 
2475
 
 
2476
  <sect1>
 
2477
    <title>Using OpenOffice.org Draw</title>
 
2478
 
 
2479
    <para>Draw is a vector graphics drawing tool that enables you to create
 
2480
    simple and complex drawings and export them in a number of common image
 
2481
    formats. Draw also allows you to insert tables, charts, formulas and other
 
2482
    items created in OpenOffice.org programmes into your drawings.</para>
 
2483
 
 
2484
    <note>
 
2485
      <title>Note:</title>
 
2486
 
 
2487
      <para>Graphics that are created using a vector graphics drawing tool do
 
2488
      not blur when resized.</para>
 
2489
    </note>
 
2490
 
 
2491
    <para>Draw is integrated with the OpenOffice.org suite, making it easy
 
2492
    toexchange of graphics with other components of the suite. For example, if
 
2493
    you create an image in Draw, reusing it in Writer is as simple as copying
 
2494
    and pasting the image. A subset of the functions in Draw are also
 
2495
    available in Writer and Impress, so you do not have to switch back and
 
2496
    forth between them and Draw to perform basic image manipulations.</para>
 
2497
 
 
2498
    <sect2>
 
2499
      <title>Key Features of OpenOffice.org Draw</title>
 
2500
 
 
2501
      <note>
 
2502
        <title>Note:</title>
 
2503
 
 
2504
        <para>Vector drawing software follows a common notation for referring
 
2505
        to all shapes, whether simple lines, rectangles or more complicated
 
2506
        shapes, as objects.</para>
 
2507
      </note>
 
2508
 
 
2509
      <para>Draw provides extensive functionality that integrates more
 
2510
      functions than the majority of drawing tools available in office suites.
 
2511
      Some of the key features of Draw are: <itemizedlist>
 
2512
          <listitem>
 
2513
            <formalpara>
 
2514
              <title>Vector Graphics Creation</title>
 
2515
 
 
2516
              <para>: You can create vector graphics in Draw by using the
 
2517
              lines and curves defined by mathematical vectors. Vectors
 
2518
              describe lines, ellipses and polygons according to their
 
2519
              geometry.</para>
 
2520
            </formalpara>
 
2521
          </listitem>
 
2522
 
 
2523
          <listitem>
 
2524
            <formalpara>
 
2525
              <title>3D Objects Creation</title>
 
2526
 
 
2527
              <para>: In Draw, you can create simple 3D objects, such as
 
2528
              cubes, spheres and cylinders, and modify the light source of the
 
2529
              objects.</para>
 
2530
            </formalpara>
 
2531
          </listitem>
 
2532
 
 
2533
          <listitem>
 
2534
            <formalpara>
 
2535
              <title>Grids and Guides:</title>
 
2536
 
 
2537
              <para>You can align objects in your drawing by using grids and
 
2538
              guides as visual cues. You can also snap an object to a grid
 
2539
              line, a guide or to the edge of another object.</para>
 
2540
            </formalpara>
 
2541
          </listitem>
 
2542
 
 
2543
          <listitem>
 
2544
            <formalpara>
 
2545
              <title>Connecting Objects to Show Relationships:</title>
 
2546
 
 
2547
              <para>You can attach objects to each other using special lines
 
2548
              called connectors to show the relationship between those
 
2549
              objects. Connectors attach to glue points on drawing objects and
 
2550
              remain attached when those objects move. These are useful for
 
2551
              creating things like organisation charts and technical
 
2552
              diagrams.</para>
 
2553
            </formalpara>
 
2554
          </listitem>
 
2555
 
 
2556
          <listitem>
 
2557
            <formalpara>
 
2558
              <title>Displaying Dimensions:</title>
 
2559
 
 
2560
              <para>You can use dimension lines to calculate and display
 
2561
              linear dimensions in technical diagrams, which often show the
 
2562
              dimensions of the objects in the drawing.</para>
 
2563
            </formalpara>
 
2564
          </listitem>
 
2565
 
 
2566
          <listitem>
 
2567
            <formalpara>
 
2568
              <title>Gallery:</title>
 
2569
 
 
2570
              <para>You can insert and use images, animations, sounds and
 
2571
              other items from the OpenOffice.org gallery in your drawings as
 
2572
              well as in other OpenOffice.org programmes.</para>
 
2573
            </formalpara>
 
2574
          </listitem>
 
2575
 
 
2576
          <listitem>
 
2577
            <formalpara>
 
2578
              <title>Graphic File Formats:</title>
 
2579
 
 
2580
              <para>Export your creation to many common graphic file formats,
 
2581
              such as BMP, GIF, JPG and PNG.</para>
 
2582
            </formalpara>
 
2583
          </listitem>
 
2584
        </itemizedlist></para>
 
2585
    </sect2>
 
2586
 
 
2587
    <sect2>
 
2588
      <title>Performing Basic Drawing Operations</title>
 
2589
 
 
2590
      <procedure>
 
2591
        <title>To launch OpenOffice.org Draw:</title>
 
2592
 
 
2593
        <step performance="required">
 
2594
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu,
 
2595
          point to <emphasis role="strong">Accessories</emphasis> and click
 
2596
          <emphasis role="strong">Terminal</emphasis> to display the <emphasis
 
2597
          role="strong">Terminal</emphasis> window. In the <emphasis
 
2598
          role="strong">Terminal</emphasis> window, type oodraw to launch
 
2599
          OpenOffice.org Draw.</para>
 
2600
 
 
2601
          <para>The main components of the <emphasis
 
2602
          role="strong">Draw</emphasis> window are shown in the following
 
2603
          graphic:</para>
 
2604
 
 
2605
          <figure float="0">
 
2606
            <title>The Draw Window</title>
 
2607
 
 
2608
            <mediaobject>
 
2609
              <imageobject>
 
2610
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_073.png"
 
2611
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
2612
              </imageobject>
 
2613
            </mediaobject>
 
2614
          </figure>
 
2615
        </step>
 
2616
 
 
2617
        <step performance="required">
 
2618
          <para>The drawings are created in the drawing area, which is
 
2619
          surrounded by the following toolbars:</para>
 
2620
 
 
2621
          <itemizedlist>
 
2622
            <listitem>
 
2623
              <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Menu</emphasis> bar lists the
 
2624
              main menus available in Draw. It includes options to manage,
 
2625
              edit and view the format of your drawings.</para>
 
2626
            </listitem>
 
2627
 
 
2628
            <listitem>
 
2629
              <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Function</emphasis> bar
 
2630
              displays icons to perform tasks such as Open, Save, Copy, Cut
 
2631
              and Paste.</para>
 
2632
            </listitem>
 
2633
 
 
2634
            <listitem>
 
2635
              <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Line and Filling</emphasis>
 
2636
              bar includes specific drawing tools to modify the appearance of
 
2637
              a selected object such as line style, colour and thickness; fill
 
2638
              style and colour.</para>
 
2639
            </listitem>
 
2640
 
 
2641
            <listitem>
 
2642
              <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> toolbar is
 
2643
              the most important toolbar in Draw. It contains all the
 
2644
              necessary functions for drawing various geometric and freehand
 
2645
              shapes. Creating basic shapes in Draw requires the extensive use
 
2646
              of this toolbar. However, you have to further edit, combine and
 
2647
              manipulate them to create complex objects.</para>
 
2648
 
 
2649
              <para>You can vary the number and position of the visible tools
 
2650
              to make the interface look a bit different. To add or remove a
 
2651
              toolbar from the Draw window:</para>
 
2652
            </listitem>
 
2653
          </itemizedlist>
 
2654
        </step>
 
2655
 
 
2656
        <step performance="required">
 
2657
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">View</emphasis> menu, point to
 
2658
          <emphasis role="strong">Toolbars.</emphasis> The <emphasis
 
2659
          role="strong">Toolbar</emphasis> list displays the toolbars
 
2660
          available, with a check mark next to the toolbars that are
 
2661
          displayed. To remove a toolbar from the Draw window, clear the
 
2662
          corresponding check mark and click the toolbar without a check mark
 
2663
          to add it to the window.</para>
 
2664
        </step>
 
2665
      </procedure>
 
2666
 
 
2667
      <procedure>
 
2668
        <title>Creating Objects</title>
 
2669
 
 
2670
        <para>To create an object by using the Drawing toolbar:</para>
 
2671
 
 
2672
        <step performance="required">
 
2673
          <para>Click a specific object button such as <emphasis
 
2674
          role="strong">Rectangle</emphasis> or <emphasis
 
2675
          role="strong">Ellipse</emphasis> on the <emphasis
 
2676
          role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> toolbar, and place the mouse cursor
 
2677
          at the point in the drawing area where you want the object to
 
2678
          start.</para>
 
2679
        </step>
 
2680
 
 
2681
        <step performance="required">
 
2682
          <para>Press the left button on the mouse, drag the cursor to where
 
2683
          you want the object to end and release the button. The object
 
2684
          appears in the Drawing area.</para>
 
2685
        </step>
 
2686
      </procedure>
 
2687
 
 
2688
      <note userlevel="instructor">
 
2689
        <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
2690
 
 
2691
        <para>The Drawing toolbar is not discussed in detail because you use
 
2692
        its options to draw only basic shapes. For novice users, demonstrate
 
2693
        the creation of a few objects, such as square, rectangle and
 
2694
        connector. Visit <ulink
 
2695
        url="http://documentation.openoffice.org/">http://documentation.openoffice.org/</ulink>
 
2696
        for more details on OpenOfice.org products.</para>
 
2697
      </note>
 
2698
 
 
2699
      <formalpara>
 
2700
        <title>Selecting Objects</title>
 
2701
 
 
2702
        <para>Before making any changes to an object, you need to select the
 
2703
        object. Draw provides the following options to select an
 
2704
        object:</para>
 
2705
      </formalpara>
 
2706
 
 
2707
      <itemizedlist>
 
2708
        <listitem>
 
2709
          <para>Direct Selection: Click the object to select it.</para>
 
2710
        </listitem>
 
2711
 
 
2712
        <listitem>
 
2713
          <para>Selection by Framing: On the <emphasis
 
2714
          role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> toolbar, click the <emphasis
 
2715
          role="strong">Select</emphasis> button and drag a large rectangle
 
2716
          around the object to select it. This option is useful for selecting
 
2717
          multiple objects in the drawing area.</para>
 
2718
 
 
2719
          <note>
 
2720
            <title>Note:</title>
 
2721
 
 
2722
            <para>You have to enclose the object(s) completely in the
 
2723
            rectangle to select them.</para>
 
2724
          </note>
 
2725
 
 
2726
          <figure float="0">
 
2727
            <title>Selecting by Framing</title>
 
2728
 
 
2729
            <mediaobject>
 
2730
              <imageobject>
 
2731
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_074.png"
 
2732
                           format="PNG" width="2cm" />
 
2733
              </imageobject>
 
2734
            </mediaobject>
 
2735
          </figure>
 
2736
        </listitem>
 
2737
 
 
2738
        <listitem>
 
2739
          <para>Selecting hidden objects: To select an object that is covered
 
2740
          by another object, press Alt key and click the object you want to
 
2741
          select.</para>
 
2742
 
 
2743
          <note>
 
2744
            <title>Note:</title>
 
2745
 
 
2746
            <para>To be able to select a hidden object, you must know the
 
2747
            position of that object relative to the objects on top.</para>
 
2748
          </note>
 
2749
        </listitem>
 
2750
      </itemizedlist>
 
2751
 
 
2752
      <formalpara>
 
2753
        <title>Editing Objects</title>
 
2754
 
 
2755
        <para>When creating objects, you may have to edit them or change their
 
2756
        properties to get the desired output. However, you may not always find
 
2757
        that flexibility in the default software settings. For example, you
 
2758
        cannot change the shape of the square to a rectangle or rotate the
 
2759
        square on its own axis by using the default <emphasis
 
2760
        role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> toolbar. To perform these tasks, Draw
 
2761
        provides various other options with the required flexibility, such
 
2762
        as:</para>
 
2763
      </formalpara>
 
2764
 
 
2765
      <note>
 
2766
        <title>Note:</title>
 
2767
 
 
2768
        <para>All the options covered in the subsequent sections apply to a
 
2769
        selected object or a group of objects. You can identify a selected
 
2770
        object from any other by the small, coloured square or circle around
 
2771
        the object. These squares or circles are called handles and form a
 
2772
        rectangular frame that is just big enough to contain the
 
2773
        object.</para>
 
2774
      </note>
 
2775
 
 
2776
      <procedure>
 
2777
        <title>Modifying Object Size</title>
 
2778
 
 
2779
        <step performance="required">
 
2780
          <para>In the Drawing area, select the created object by clicking it.
 
2781
          Handles appear on the object.</para>
 
2782
 
 
2783
          <figure float="0">
 
2784
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting an
 
2785
            Object</emphasis></title>
 
2786
 
 
2787
            <mediaobject>
 
2788
              <imageobject>
 
2789
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_075.png"
 
2790
                           format="PNG" width="5cm" />
 
2791
              </imageobject>
 
2792
            </mediaobject>
 
2793
          </figure>
 
2794
        </step>
 
2795
 
 
2796
        <step performance="required">
 
2797
          <para>Place the mouse cursor over one of the handles. When the
 
2798
          cursor becomes a double-headed arrow, drag the cursor in the
 
2799
          direction of the arrow to modify the size of the object. If you
 
2800
          choose a corner handle, you will resize the object along two axes at
 
2801
          the same time. If you use a side handle, the objects will only be
 
2802
          resized along one axis. The outline of the resulting new object
 
2803
          appears as a dotted line.</para>
 
2804
        </step>
 
2805
 
 
2806
        <step performance="required">
 
2807
          <para>Release the mouse button when the object is sized correctly.
 
2808
          The dotted line disappears, and the resized object appears.</para>
 
2809
 
 
2810
          <figure float="0">
 
2811
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Modifying the
 
2812
            Object</emphasis></title>
 
2813
 
 
2814
            <mediaobject>
 
2815
              <imageobject>
 
2816
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_076.png"
 
2817
                           format="PNG" width="13cm" />
 
2818
              </imageobject>
 
2819
            </mediaobject>
 
2820
          </figure>
 
2821
        </step>
 
2822
      </procedure>
 
2823
 
 
2824
      <formalpara>
 
2825
        <title>Arranging Objects</title>
 
2826
 
 
2827
        <para>If the document you are working on includes many overlapping
 
2828
        objects, editing of individual objects (which may or may not be
 
2829
        visible) might pose a challenge. Fortunately, Draw provides a way to
 
2830
        rearrange objects without affecting their layout.</para>
 
2831
      </formalpara>
 
2832
 
 
2833
      <procedure>
 
2834
        <title>To change the arrangement of objects:</title>
 
2835
 
 
2836
        <step performance="required">
 
2837
          <para>In the drawing area, right-click the object you want to
 
2838
          rearrange, point to <emphasis role="strong">Arrange</emphasis> and
 
2839
          select the appropriate option from the <emphasis
 
2840
          role="strong">Arrange</emphasis> list.</para>
 
2841
 
 
2842
          <figure float="0">
 
2843
            <title>Rearranging the Object</title>
 
2844
 
 
2845
            <mediaobject>
 
2846
              <imageobject>
 
2847
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_077.png"
 
2848
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
2849
              </imageobject>
 
2850
            </mediaobject>
 
2851
          </figure>
 
2852
        </step>
 
2853
 
 
2854
        <step performance="required">
 
2855
          <para>If you select the <emphasis role="strong">Send
 
2856
          Backward</emphasis> option, the output is as shown in the following
 
2857
          graphic:</para>
 
2858
 
 
2859
          <figure float="0">
 
2860
            <title>Object Sent Backwards</title>
 
2861
 
 
2862
            <mediaobject>
 
2863
              <imageobject>
 
2864
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_078.png"
 
2865
                           format="PNG" width="5cm" />
 
2866
              </imageobject>
 
2867
            </mediaobject>
 
2868
          </figure>
 
2869
 
 
2870
          <note userlevel="instructor">
 
2871
            <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
2872
 
 
2873
            <para>If time permits, ask the students to explore the other
 
2874
            options in the Arrange list. In addition, explain which option to
 
2875
            use under what circumstances. Specifically discuss the <emphasis
 
2876
            role="strong">Behind Object</emphasis> option and the difference
 
2877
            between the output from the <emphasis role="strong">Send to
 
2878
            Back</emphasis> and <emphasis role="strong">Behind
 
2879
            Object</emphasis> options. This is a low-priority activity.</para>
 
2880
          </note>
 
2881
        </step>
 
2882
      </procedure>
 
2883
 
 
2884
      <formalpara>
 
2885
        <title>Duplicating Objects</title>
 
2886
 
 
2887
        <para>Often, you may need to create multiple objects of the same shape
 
2888
        and size. In Draw, you can duplicate or make multiple copies of an
 
2889
        object. The copies can be identical or differ in size, colour,
 
2890
        orientation and location.</para>
 
2891
      </formalpara>
 
2892
 
 
2893
      <procedure>
 
2894
        <title>To create multiple copies of an object:</title>
 
2895
 
 
2896
        <step performance="required">
 
2897
          <para>Click the object to be copied, click <emphasis
 
2898
          role="strong">Edit</emphasis> and select the <emphasis
 
2899
          role="strong">Duplicate</emphasis> option. The <emphasis
 
2900
          role="strong">Duplicate</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
 
2901
        </step>
 
2902
 
 
2903
        <step performance="required">
 
2904
          <para>Specify the appropriate values in the <emphasis
 
2905
          role="strong">Duplicate</emphasis> dialogue box, and click <emphasis
 
2906
          role="strong">OK</emphasis> to display the output in the drawing
 
2907
          area.</para>
 
2908
 
 
2909
          <figure float="0">
 
2910
            <title>Duplicating Objects</title>
 
2911
 
 
2912
            <mediaobject>
 
2913
              <imageobject>
 
2914
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_079.png"
 
2915
                           format="PNG" width="12cm" />
 
2916
              </imageobject>
 
2917
            </mediaobject>
 
2918
          </figure>
 
2919
        </step>
 
2920
      </procedure>
 
2921
 
 
2922
      <formalpara>
 
2923
        <title>Grouping and Combining Objects</title>
 
2924
 
 
2925
        <para>When creating or editing an object, the object might be
 
2926
        displaced from its original position. This change in location disturbs
 
2927
        the relative position of the object to the others in the drawing. This
 
2928
        could be critical where accuracy, in terms of position, is important
 
2929
        such as in architectural drawings. Using Draw, you can combine drawing
 
2930
        objects in two distinct ways, grouping and combining.</para>
 
2931
      </formalpara>
 
2932
 
 
2933
      <formalpara>
 
2934
        <title>Grouping Objects</title>
 
2935
 
 
2936
        <para>Grouping objects is like putting them into a container, where
 
2937
        the objects are grouped with each other but retain their individual
 
2938
        identities. You can move the group as one entity and apply changes to
 
2939
        all the enclosed objects. A group can always be undone, and the
 
2940
        objects that constitute the group can always be manipulated
 
2941
        separately.</para>
 
2942
      </formalpara>
 
2943
 
 
2944
      <procedure>
 
2945
        <title>To group objects:</title>
 
2946
 
 
2947
        <step performance="required">
 
2948
          <para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> area, select
 
2949
          all the objects you want to include in the group. Right click any
 
2950
          selected object, and then select the <emphasis
 
2951
          role="strong">Group</emphasis> option.</para>
 
2952
        </step>
 
2953
 
 
2954
        <step performance="required">
 
2955
          <para>Click any object in the group; handles appear around the
 
2956
          entire group instead of around an object.</para>
 
2957
        </step>
 
2958
      </procedure>
 
2959
 
 
2960
      <para>You can now modify the entire group, without applying effects to
 
2961
      objects individually. To resize a group: <itemizedlist>
 
2962
          <listitem>
 
2963
            <para>Place the mouse cursor over one of the handles. When the
 
2964
            cursor becomes a double-headed arrow, drag the cursor to increase
 
2965
            or decrease the size of the objects in the group. All the objects
 
2966
            in the group are resized equally.</para>
 
2967
          </listitem>
 
2968
        </itemizedlist></para>
 
2969
 
 
2970
      <procedure>
 
2971
        <title>You can also edit a single object in the group without breaking
 
2972
        it. To edit individual objects in a group:</title>
 
2973
 
 
2974
        <step performance="required">
 
2975
          <para>Double-click an object in the group. You can now enter the
 
2976
          group and work on individual objects.</para>
 
2977
        </step>
 
2978
 
 
2979
        <step performance="required">
 
2980
          <para>Click the object you want to edit; the handles appear around
 
2981
          that object. In this mode, you can edit, add or delete this
 
2982
          object.</para>
 
2983
        </step>
 
2984
 
 
2985
        <step performance="required">
 
2986
          <para>To re-instate the group after modifying the object,
 
2987
          double-click anywhere outside the selection frame.</para>
 
2988
        </step>
 
2989
      </procedure>
 
2990
 
 
2991
      <note>
 
2992
        <title>Note:</title>
 
2993
 
 
2994
        <para>You can group objects of all shapes and sizes. You can group
 
2995
        objects in 2D, 3D or a combination of both. However, you can combine
 
2996
        only overlapping 2D objects.</para>
 
2997
      </note>
 
2998
 
 
2999
      <formalpara>
 
3000
        <title>Combining Objects</title>
 
3001
 
 
3002
        <para>Combining drawing objects is similar to grouping, except that
 
3003
        combining creates a permanent fusion of objects, leading to the
 
3004
        formation of a new object. The original objects are no longer
 
3005
        available as individual entities, and you cannot enter the group to
 
3006
        edit the individual objects. When you combine the objects, the group
 
3007
        takes on the properties of the lower-most object in the
 
3008
        arrangement.</para>
 
3009
      </formalpara>
 
3010
 
 
3011
      <procedure>
 
3012
        <title>To combine objects:</title>
 
3013
 
 
3014
        <step performance="required">
 
3015
          <para>In the drawing area, select multiple 2D objects.</para>
 
3016
 
 
3017
          <note>
 
3018
            <title>Note:</title>
 
3019
 
 
3020
            <para>The lower-most object in the following graphic is the blue
 
3021
            object.</para>
 
3022
          </note>
 
3023
 
 
3024
          <figure float="0">
 
3025
            <title>Combining Objects</title>
 
3026
 
 
3027
            <mediaobject>
 
3028
              <imageobject>
 
3029
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_080.png"
 
3030
                           format="PNG" width="4cm" />
 
3031
              </imageobject>
 
3032
            </mediaobject>
 
3033
          </figure>
 
3034
        </step>
 
3035
 
 
3036
        <step performance="required">
 
3037
          <para>Right-click any of the objects in the selection and click the
 
3038
          Combine option in the list. Where the objects overlap, the
 
3039
          overlapping zone is either filled or empty, depending on the number
 
3040
          of overlaps. When the number of overlaps is even, you get an empty
 
3041
          space. When the number of overlaps is odd, you get a filled
 
3042
          area.</para>
 
3043
 
 
3044
          <figure float="0">
 
3045
            <title>The Overlapping Zone</title>
 
3046
 
 
3047
            <mediaobject>
 
3048
              <imageobject>
 
3049
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_081.png"
 
3050
                           format="PNG" width="4cm" />
 
3051
              </imageobject>
 
3052
            </mediaobject>
 
3053
          </figure>
 
3054
        </step>
 
3055
 
 
3056
        <step performance="required">
 
3057
          <para>After you have combined the objects, you can select the
 
3058
          combined objects as an entity. However, you will not be able to
 
3059
          select the empty area in the object.</para>
 
3060
        </step>
 
3061
      </procedure>
 
3062
 
 
3063
      <itemizedlist>
 
3064
        <title>To split the objects:</title>
 
3065
 
 
3066
        <listitem>
 
3067
          <para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> area,
 
3068
          right-click the combination created in the previous procedure and
 
3069
          select the <emphasis role="strong">Split</emphasis> option from the
 
3070
          list.</para>
 
3071
 
 
3072
          <figure float="0">
 
3073
            <title>Splitting Objects</title>
 
3074
 
 
3075
            <mediaobject>
 
3076
              <imageobject>
 
3077
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_082.png"
 
3078
                           format="PNG" width="4cm" />
 
3079
              </imageobject>
 
3080
            </mediaobject>
 
3081
          </figure>
 
3082
 
 
3083
          <para>Note that the objects return to their original status.
 
3084
          However, the properties of the objects have now changed as per the
 
3085
          last object in the arrangement.</para>
 
3086
        </listitem>
 
3087
      </itemizedlist>
 
3088
 
 
3089
      <formalpara>
 
3090
        <title>Editing Colours and Textures</title>
 
3091
 
 
3092
        <para>When creating a drawing, you may need to work with objects of
 
3093
        variable colours and textures in the same drawing area. You can
 
3094
        customise the area fill of an object by using the <emphasis
 
3095
        role="strong">Line and Fill</emphasis> toolbar.</para>
 
3096
      </formalpara>
 
3097
 
 
3098
      <note>
 
3099
        <title>Note:</title>
 
3100
 
 
3101
        <para>The OpenOffice.org term for the inside of an object is area
 
3102
        fill. The area fill of an object can be of uniform colour, a gradient
 
3103
        or an image.</para>
 
3104
      </note>
 
3105
 
 
3106
      <procedure>
 
3107
        <title>Editing a Colour Fill</title>
 
3108
 
 
3109
        <para>To edit the colour fill of an object:</para>
 
3110
 
 
3111
        <step performance="required">
 
3112
          <para>In the drawing area, select the object you want to edit and
 
3113
          click the <emphasis role="strong">Area</emphasis> button on the
 
3114
          <emphasis role="strong">Line and Fill</emphasis> toolbar. The
 
3115
          <emphasis role="strong">Area</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
 
3116
 
 
3117
          <figure float="0">
 
3118
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Editing a Colour
 
3119
            Fill</emphasis></title>
 
3120
 
 
3121
            <mediaobject>
 
3122
              <imageobject>
 
3123
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_083.png"
 
3124
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3125
              </imageobject>
 
3126
            </mediaobject>
 
3127
          </figure>
 
3128
        </step>
 
3129
 
 
3130
        <step performance="required">
 
3131
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Area</emphasis> dialogue box
 
3132
          provides the option to change the existing colour fill of the
 
3133
          object. Click the <emphasis role="strong">Colours</emphasis> tab,
 
3134
          select a colour listed under the <emphasis
 
3135
          role="strong">Table</emphasis> category and click <emphasis
 
3136
          role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the change.</para>
 
3137
 
 
3138
          <figure float="0">
 
3139
            <title><emphasis role="italic">Selecting a Colour
 
3140
            Fill</emphasis></title>
 
3141
 
 
3142
            <mediaobject>
 
3143
              <imageobject>
 
3144
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_084.png"
 
3145
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3146
              </imageobject>
 
3147
            </mediaobject>
 
3148
          </figure>
 
3149
        </step>
 
3150
 
 
3151
        <step performance="required">
 
3152
          <para>The Table category lists the standard colours or the colours
 
3153
          that are used most often. However, if you need a colour or shade
 
3154
          that is not available in the list, go ahead and create it! To define
 
3155
          a custom colour:</para>
 
3156
 
 
3157
          <substeps performance="required">
 
3158
            <step performance="required">
 
3159
              <para>Click the standard colour closest to your needs, and
 
3160
              specify the RGB ratio to change its tone and hue.</para>
 
3161
 
 
3162
              <note>
 
3163
                <title>Note:</title>
 
3164
 
 
3165
                <para>Draw provides you two options to define a colour. You
 
3166
                can specify the colour in the RGB or CMYK ratio. For CMYK,
 
3167
                click RGB and then select CMYK from the options.</para>
 
3168
              </note>
 
3169
            </step>
 
3170
 
 
3171
            <step performance="required">
 
3172
              <para>If you want to add a new custom colour to the available
 
3173
              list, type its name in the Name box, specify the RGB ratio and
 
3174
              click Add. The standard list under the Table category displays
 
3175
              the new colour.</para>
 
3176
 
 
3177
              <tip>
 
3178
                <title>Nice to Know:</title>
 
3179
 
 
3180
                <para>Every colour is specified by a combination of the three
 
3181
                primary colours, Red, Green and Blue, hence the notation
 
3182
                RGB.</para>
 
3183
              </tip>
 
3184
            </step>
 
3185
 
 
3186
            <step performance="required">
 
3187
              <para>Click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the
 
3188
              change.</para>
 
3189
 
 
3190
              <figure float="0">
 
3191
                <title><emphasis role="italic">The Customised Colour
 
3192
                Fill</emphasis></title>
 
3193
 
 
3194
                <mediaobject>
 
3195
                  <imageobject>
 
3196
                    <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_085.png"
 
3197
                               format="PNG" width="3cm" />
 
3198
                  </imageobject>
 
3199
                </mediaobject>
 
3200
              </figure>
 
3201
            </step>
 
3202
          </substeps>
 
3203
        </step>
 
3204
      </procedure>
 
3205
 
 
3206
      <formalpara>
 
3207
        <title>Editing a Gradient Fill</title>
 
3208
 
 
3209
        <para>A gradient is a smooth transition between two different colours
 
3210
        or shades of the same colour, which you can apply to a drawing object.
 
3211
        To edit the gradient fill of an object:</para>
 
3212
      </formalpara>
 
3213
 
 
3214
      <para>In the Drawing area, select the object you want to edit and click
 
3215
      the Area button on the Line and Fill toolbar. The <emphasis
 
3216
      role="strong">Area</emphasis> dialogue box opens.</para>
 
3217
 
 
3218
      <para>Click the <emphasis role="strong">Gradients</emphasis> tab, select
 
3219
      a gradient from the gradient list and click <emphasis
 
3220
      role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the change to the object.</para>
 
3221
 
 
3222
      <figure float="0">
 
3223
        <title>Editing a Gradient Fill</title>
 
3224
 
 
3225
        <mediaobject>
 
3226
          <imageobject>
 
3227
            <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_086.png" format="PNG"
 
3228
                       width="4cm" />
 
3229
          </imageobject>
 
3230
        </mediaobject>
 
3231
      </figure>
 
3232
 
 
3233
      <note userlevel="instructor">
 
3234
        <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
3235
 
 
3236
        <para>Mention that by using the Area dialogue box, students can also
 
3237
        add or modify the other properties of objects such as using a shadow
 
3238
        on an object, increasing or decreasing transparency, crosshatching the
 
3239
        object or adding their own bitmap images as the area fill of the
 
3240
        object.</para>
 
3241
      </note>
 
3242
 
 
3243
      <formalpara>
 
3244
        <title>Editing Text</title>
 
3245
 
 
3246
        <para>Draw provides you the following options to insert text in the
 
3247
        <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> area: <itemizedlist>
 
3248
            <listitem>
 
3249
              <para><emphasis role="strong">The Text tool on the Drawing
 
3250
              toolbar:</emphasis> You can create a text frame anywhere in the
 
3251
              drawing area, and you can work with this text box like you do
 
3252
              with any other object.</para>
 
3253
            </listitem>
 
3254
 
 
3255
            <listitem>
 
3256
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Callouts next to the
 
3257
              object:</emphasis> You can use this when you want to relate the
 
3258
              text to the object. Click the <emphasis
 
3259
              role="strong">Callouts</emphasis> tool on the <emphasis
 
3260
              role="strong"> Drawing</emphasis> toolbar.</para>
 
3261
            </listitem>
 
3262
 
 
3263
            <listitem>
 
3264
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Text superimposed on a drawing
 
3265
              object:</emphasis> Double-click the object. A text box opens.
 
3266
              Type the necessary text in it.</para>
 
3267
            </listitem>
 
3268
          </itemizedlist></para>
 
3269
      </formalpara>
 
3270
 
 
3271
      <para>The following graphic displays various options for inserting text
 
3272
      relevant to an object in the Drawing area:</para>
 
3273
 
 
3274
      <figure float="0">
 
3275
        <title>Editing Text in the Drawing Area</title>
 
3276
 
 
3277
        <mediaobject>
 
3278
          <imageobject>
 
3279
            <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_087.png" format="PNG"
 
3280
                       width="6cm" />
 
3281
          </imageobject>
 
3282
        </mediaobject>
 
3283
      </figure>
 
3284
 
 
3285
      <formalpara>
 
3286
        <title>Visual Effects</title>
 
3287
 
 
3288
        <para>Apart from offering the basic drawing tools, Draw provides scope
 
3289
        for you to add some visual effects to your drawings.</para>
 
3290
      </formalpara>
 
3291
 
 
3292
      <formalpara>
 
3293
        <title>Cross-Fading</title>
 
3294
 
 
3295
        <para>The cross-fading feature in Draw transforms one shape into
 
3296
        another. The result is a new group of objects, including the start and
 
3297
        end objects and the intermediate shapes.</para>
 
3298
      </formalpara>
 
3299
 
 
3300
      <procedure>
 
3301
        <title>To cross-fade:</title>
 
3302
 
 
3303
        <step performance="required">
 
3304
          <para>Create two objects of different shapes in the drawing area and
 
3305
          select them.</para>
 
3306
 
 
3307
          <figure float="0">
 
3308
            <title>Applying Visual Effects</title>
 
3309
 
 
3310
            <mediaobject>
 
3311
              <imageobject>
 
3312
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_088.png"
 
3313
                           format="PNG" width="4cm" />
 
3314
              </imageobject>
 
3315
            </mediaobject>
 
3316
          </figure>
 
3317
        </step>
 
3318
 
 
3319
        <step performance="required">
 
3320
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Edit</emphasis> menu, click the
 
3321
          <emphasis role="strong">Cross-fading</emphasis> option to display
 
3322
          the <emphasis role="strong">Cross-fading</emphasis> dialogue
 
3323
          box.</para>
 
3324
        </step>
 
3325
 
 
3326
        <step performance="required">
 
3327
          <para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Cross-fading</emphasis>
 
3328
          dialogue box, select the number of incremental objects between the
 
3329
          ends. Retain the default selection for smoother transition, and
 
3330
          click OK to display the result in the drawing area.</para>
 
3331
 
 
3332
          <figure float="0">
 
3333
            <title>Cross-Faded Objects</title>
 
3334
 
 
3335
            <mediaobject>
 
3336
              <imageobject>
 
3337
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_089.png"
 
3338
                           format="PNG" width="4cm" />
 
3339
              </imageobject>
 
3340
            </mediaobject>
 
3341
          </figure>
 
3342
        </step>
 
3343
      </procedure>
 
3344
 
 
3345
      <note>
 
3346
        <title>Note:</title>
 
3347
 
 
3348
        <para>You can vary the order of the objects by changing their
 
3349
        arrangement in the drawing area.</para>
 
3350
      </note>
 
3351
 
 
3352
      <note userlevel="instructor">
 
3353
        <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
3354
 
 
3355
        <para>Draw provides many more features and tools. For more information
 
3356
        on the detailed features of Draw and other OpenOffice.org
 
3357
        applications, refer the students to <ulink
 
3358
        url="http://documentation.openoffice.org/">http://documentation.openoffice.org/</ulink>.</para>
 
3359
      </note>
 
3360
    </sect2>
 
3361
  </sect1>
 
3362
 
 
3363
  <sect1>
 
3364
    <title>Using OpenOffice.org Math</title>
 
3365
 
 
3366
    <para>Math is the equation writer component of OpenOffice.org office
 
3367
    software suite. It contains a number of functions, operators and
 
3368
    formatting assistants to help you create properly formatted equations and
 
3369
    formulae. These formulae can then be imported for display in any other
 
3370
    OpenOffice.org applications.</para>
 
3371
 
 
3372
    <sect2>
 
3373
      <title>Key Features of OpenOffice.org Math</title>
 
3374
 
 
3375
      <para>Some of the important features and capabilities of Math are
 
3376
      discussed in the following section: <itemizedlist>
 
3377
          <listitem>
 
3378
            <formalpara>
 
3379
              <title>Creating a Formula:</title>
 
3380
 
 
3381
              <para>Math offers you the convenience of creating formulae as
 
3382
              objects within your document. You can invoke Math from inside a
 
3383
              document whenever you need to insert a formula or equation into
 
3384
              the document. With Math, you have a large selection of
 
3385
              pre-defined symbols and functions at your disposal for creating,
 
3386
              editing and formatting a formulae.</para>
 
3387
            </formalpara>
 
3388
          </listitem>
 
3389
 
 
3390
          <listitem>
 
3391
            <formalpara>
 
3392
              <title>Typing a Formula Directly:</title>
 
3393
 
 
3394
              <para>If you are familiar with the Math markup language, you can
 
3395
              also type an equation directly in your document and then invoke
 
3396
              Math to convert the markup into a formatted formula.</para>
 
3397
            </formalpara>
 
3398
          </listitem>
 
3399
 
 
3400
          <listitem>
 
3401
            <formalpara>
 
3402
              <title>Creating a Formula in the Commands Window:</title>
 
3403
 
 
3404
              <para>While you make entries in the commands window, you can
 
3405
              simultaneously view the results in the document.</para>
 
3406
            </formalpara>
 
3407
          </listitem>
 
3408
 
 
3409
          <listitem>
 
3410
            <formalpara>
 
3411
              <title>Creating Individual Symbols:</title>
 
3412
 
 
3413
              <para>Why not create or own symbols and import new characters
 
3414
              from other fonts? You can add the new symbols in the basic math
 
3415
              catalogue or create a new catalogue for the new symbols.</para>
 
3416
            </formalpara>
 
3417
          </listitem>
 
3418
 
 
3419
          <listitem>
 
3420
            <formalpara>
 
3421
              <title>Creating Formulae in Context:</title>
 
3422
 
 
3423
              <para>Math provides you the ease of working with the context
 
3424
              menus, which can be displayed at a right mouse-click. These
 
3425
              context menus contain all commands that are found on the
 
3426
              Selection window. Moreover, you can insert these into the
 
3427
              document with just a mouse click.</para>
 
3428
            </formalpara>
 
3429
          </listitem>
 
3430
        </itemizedlist></para>
 
3431
 
 
3432
      <note>
 
3433
        <title>Note:</title>
 
3434
 
 
3435
        <para>Math is only used to create properly formatted equations in its
 
3436
        symbolic form. It cannot be used for calculation purposes.</para>
 
3437
      </note>
 
3438
    </sect2>
 
3439
 
 
3440
    <sect2>
 
3441
      <title>Creating and Editing Formulae</title>
 
3442
 
 
3443
      <para>Though Math can be used with all the OpenOffice.org applications,
 
3444
      it is primarily used as an equation editor with text documents.</para>
 
3445
 
 
3446
      <procedure>
 
3447
        <title>To be able to use Math when working with Writer perform the
 
3448
        following steps:</title>
 
3449
 
 
3450
        <step performance="required">
 
3451
          <para>Position the cursor on the document where you want to insert
 
3452
          the formula. On the Insert menu, point to <emphasis
 
3453
          role="strong">Object</emphasis> and then click <emphasis
 
3454
          role="strong">Formula</emphasis>.</para>
 
3455
 
 
3456
          <figure float="0">
 
3457
            <title>Launching Math</title>
 
3458
 
 
3459
            <mediaobject>
 
3460
              <imageobject>
 
3461
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_090.png"
 
3462
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3463
              </imageobject>
 
3464
            </mediaobject>
 
3465
          </figure>
 
3466
        </step>
 
3467
 
 
3468
        <step performance="required">
 
3469
          <para>This invokes Math from inside the Writer window. Notice that
 
3470
          the equation editor appears at the bottom of the document window.
 
3471
          You can now access all the Math tools from inside the Writer window.
 
3472
          A placeholder box appears besides the text where the equation is to
 
3473
          be entered.</para>
 
3474
 
 
3475
          <para>The simplest method to enter an equation in your document is
 
3476
          to use the <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window. By
 
3477
          default, the <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window is
 
3478
          not displayed. To display the <emphasis
 
3479
          role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window, on the <emphasis
 
3480
          role="strong">View</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis
 
3481
          role="strong">Selection</emphasis>.</para>
 
3482
 
 
3483
          <figure float="0">
 
3484
            <title>Displaying the Selection Window</title>
 
3485
 
 
3486
            <mediaobject>
 
3487
              <imageobject>
 
3488
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_091.png"
 
3489
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3490
              </imageobject>
 
3491
            </mediaobject>
 
3492
          </figure>
 
3493
        </step>
 
3494
 
 
3495
        <step performance="required">
 
3496
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window
 
3497
          appears as a floating toolbar. Notice that the <emphasis
 
3498
          role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window is divided into two
 
3499
          halves. The upper half contains the symbol categories, and the lower
 
3500
          half displays the symbols available in the selected category. You
 
3501
          can now start inserting the equation by selecting the symbols from
 
3502
          the <emphasis role="strong"> Selection</emphasis> window.</para>
 
3503
 
 
3504
          <para>To insert a symbol, such as "a/b" select the appropriate
 
3505
          category from the upper half and click the appropriate symbol from
 
3506
          the lower half of the <emphasis role="strong"> Selection</emphasis>
 
3507
          window.</para>
 
3508
 
 
3509
          <figure float="0">
 
3510
            <title>Using the Selection Window</title>
 
3511
 
 
3512
            <mediaobject>
 
3513
              <imageobject>
 
3514
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_092.png"
 
3515
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3516
              </imageobject>
 
3517
            </mediaobject>
 
3518
          </figure>
 
3519
        </step>
 
3520
 
 
3521
        <step performance="required">
 
3522
          <para>You will notice that when you select the symbol on the
 
3523
          <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window, the markup for
 
3524
          the selected symbol appears in the equation editor. Simultaneously,
 
3525
          some grey boxes appear in the main text body.</para>
 
3526
 
 
3527
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">&lt;?&gt;</emphasis> symbols
 
3528
          appearing in the equation editor are placeholders where you need to
 
3529
          enter the actual text or symbol associated with your formula.</para>
 
3530
 
 
3531
          <figure float="0">
 
3532
            <title>Inserting Symbols</title>
 
3533
 
 
3534
            <mediaobject>
 
3535
              <imageobject>
 
3536
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_093.png"
 
3537
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3538
              </imageobject>
 
3539
            </mediaobject>
 
3540
          </figure>
 
3541
        </step>
 
3542
 
 
3543
        <step performance="required">
 
3544
          <para>As you enter the required text or symbol into the
 
3545
          placeholders, the grey boxes are simultaneously updated with the
 
3546
          equation. You can enter the rest of the equation in the same
 
3547
          fashion.</para>
 
3548
        </step>
 
3549
 
 
3550
        <step performance="required">
 
3551
          <para>Once you enter the complete equation using the <emphasis
 
3552
          role="strong">Selection</emphasis> window, the equation appears as
 
3553
          an object in your document window and you can view the complete
 
3554
          markup for the equation in the equation editor. Exit the formula
 
3555
          editor by clicking anywhere on the document body.</para>
 
3556
 
 
3557
          <figure float="0">
 
3558
            <title>The Inserted Equation</title>
 
3559
 
 
3560
            <mediaobject>
 
3561
              <imageobject>
 
3562
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_094.png"
 
3563
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3564
              </imageobject>
 
3565
            </mediaobject>
 
3566
          </figure>
 
3567
        </step>
 
3568
 
 
3569
        <step performance="required">
 
3570
          <para>Once the formula is inserted in your document, you may want to
 
3571
          modify it further. To edit a formula right-click once on it and
 
3572
          select <emphasis role="strong">Edit</emphasis> from the short-cut
 
3573
          menu.</para>
 
3574
 
 
3575
          <figure float="0">
 
3576
            <title>Editing Equation</title>
 
3577
 
 
3578
            <mediaobject>
 
3579
              <imageobject>
 
3580
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_095.png"
 
3581
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3582
              </imageobject>
 
3583
            </mediaobject>
 
3584
          </figure>
 
3585
        </step>
 
3586
 
 
3587
        <step performance="required">
 
3588
          <para>Now you can insert new symbols into your formula or delete
 
3589
          ones you no longer need.</para>
 
3590
 
 
3591
          <figure float="0">
 
3592
            <title>Inserting New Symbols</title>
 
3593
 
 
3594
            <mediaobject>
 
3595
              <imageobject>
 
3596
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_096.png"
 
3597
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3598
              </imageobject>
 
3599
            </mediaobject>
 
3600
          </figure>
 
3601
        </step>
 
3602
 
 
3603
        <step performance="required">
 
3604
          <para>Though Greek characters are widely used in mathematical
 
3605
          formulae, especially geometric formulae, these characters are not
 
3606
          available in either the Selection window or the Context menu.</para>
 
3607
        </step>
 
3608
 
 
3609
        <step performance="required">
 
3610
          <para>You can enter Greek characters by typing the markup language
 
3611
          for them in the equation editor. Alternatively, you can use the
 
3612
          <emphasis role="strong">Catalog</emphasis> window. To display the
 
3613
          Catalog window, on the Tools menu, click Catalog.</para>
 
3614
 
 
3615
          <figure float="0">
 
3616
            <title>Launching the Catalogue Window</title>
 
3617
 
 
3618
            <mediaobject>
 
3619
              <imageobject>
 
3620
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_097.png"
 
3621
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3622
              </imageobject>
 
3623
            </mediaobject>
 
3624
          </figure>
 
3625
        </step>
 
3626
 
 
3627
        <step performance="required">
 
3628
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Symbols </emphasis> dialogue box
 
3629
          is displayed. Before selecting a character, ensure that <emphasis
 
3630
          role="strong">Greek </emphasis> is selected under the <emphasis
 
3631
          role="strong">Symbol</emphasis> set drop-down window. Select the
 
3632
          required Greek character from the <emphasis role="strong">Symbols
 
3633
          </emphasis> window and click <emphasis
 
3634
          role="strong">Insert</emphasis>.</para>
 
3635
 
 
3636
          <figure float="0">
 
3637
            <title>Inserting Greek Symbols</title>
 
3638
 
 
3639
            <mediaobject>
 
3640
              <imageobject>
 
3641
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_098.png"
 
3642
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3643
              </imageobject>
 
3644
            </mediaobject>
 
3645
          </figure>
 
3646
        </step>
 
3647
 
 
3648
        <step performance="required">
 
3649
          <para>The character is inserted into your document and the markup is
 
3650
          displayed in the equation editor. You can continue entering formulas
 
3651
          into your document following the same procedure. Once you have
 
3652
          entered all the required formulae, your document may appear like
 
3653
          this:</para>
 
3654
 
 
3655
          <figure float="0">
 
3656
            <title>Final Equations</title>
 
3657
 
 
3658
            <mediaobject>
 
3659
              <imageobject>
 
3660
                <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_099.png"
 
3661
                           format="PNG" width="11cm" />
 
3662
              </imageobject>
 
3663
            </mediaobject>
 
3664
          </figure>
 
3665
        </step>
 
3666
      </procedure>
 
3667
    </sect2>
 
3668
  </sect1>
 
3669
 
 
3670
  <sect1>
 
3671
    <title>Additional Applications</title>
 
3672
 
 
3673
    <sect2>
 
3674
      <title>GnuCash Accounting</title>
 
3675
 
 
3676
      <para>GnuCash is an application that helps you track home or small
 
3677
      business finances. Instead of tracking all your expenses on paper, you
 
3678
      can use GnuCash to ensure that you don't lose any information at the end
 
3679
      of the month. All details of income and expenditure can be managed with
 
3680
      this utility. Using GnuCash, a small business can track its customers as
 
3681
      well as its vendors by entering their details. You can also create a
 
3682
      monthly profit/loss report for your business.</para>
 
3683
 
 
3684
      <para>GnuCash can store and manage the details of all your bank accounts
 
3685
      in one place. GnuCash is based on double-entry bookkeeping (the sort
 
3686
      that trained, professional accountants use) to ensure balanced accounts
 
3687
      and accurate reports.</para>
 
3688
 
 
3689
      <para>GnuCash is easy to use and can be tailored as per your
 
3690
      needs.</para>
 
3691
 
 
3692
      <figure float="0">
 
3693
        <title>The GnuCash Accounting Application</title>
 
3694
 
 
3695
        <mediaobject>
 
3696
          <imageobject>
 
3697
            <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_100.png" format="PNG"
 
3698
                       width="11cm" />
 
3699
          </imageobject>
 
3700
        </mediaobject>
 
3701
      </figure>
 
3702
 
 
3703
      <formalpara>
 
3704
        <title>Key Features of the GnuCash Application</title>
 
3705
 
 
3706
        <para>Using GnuCash is like filling your personal finance information
 
3707
        in a register but in a more organised way. The following features make
 
3708
        GnuCash a very useful, powerful, yet flexible software programme:
 
3709
        <itemizedlist>
 
3710
            <listitem>
 
3711
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Easy-to-Use Interface:</emphasis>
 
3712
              The interface of GnuCash is as simple to use as keeping records
 
3713
              on a piece of paper. It also has a Quick-Fill feature, which
 
3714
              means that as soon as you type a few characters, GnuCash scans
 
3715
              its list and completes the entry automatically. If you use an
 
3716
              entry on a regular basis, you don't need to type it every
 
3717
              time.</para>
 
3718
            </listitem>
 
3719
 
 
3720
            <listitem>
 
3721
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Double Entry System:</emphasis>
 
3722
              Following the principles of double-entry accounting, in GnuCash
 
3723
              each transaction has to be mentioned in two places -- debit in
 
3724
              one account and credit in another. This means that the
 
3725
              difference between income and expenses exactly equals the sum of
 
3726
              all assets and equity. This will help you verify that you have
 
3727
              entered the details of the income and expenses accurately,
 
3728
              which, in turn, will also help you track all expenses.</para>
 
3729
            </listitem>
 
3730
 
 
3731
            <listitem>
 
3732
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Reports:</emphasis> You can
 
3733
              generate a vast range of reports using GnuCash. Home users can
 
3734
              generate a Budget report, which will give them a clear view of
 
3735
              the income and expenses for the month. You can also generate a
 
3736
              Tax report for calculating tax based on tax-related income and
 
3737
              expenses. A vast range of Business reports, such as Customer and
 
3738
              Vendor reports, can also be generated. Another report that can
 
3739
              be generated is the Assets and Liabilities report, which
 
3740
              includes the balance sheet.</para>
 
3741
            </listitem>
 
3742
 
 
3743
            <listitem>
 
3744
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Multi-Currency Transaction
 
3745
              Handling:</emphasis> You need not worry about transactions in
 
3746
              different currencies; GnuCash automatically handles currency
 
3747
              conversions. In addition, GnuCash provides menus and pop-up
 
3748
              windows in different languages.</para>
 
3749
            </listitem>
 
3750
 
 
3751
            <listitem>
 
3752
              <para><emphasis role="strong">The Reconcile Window:</emphasis>
 
3753
              GnuCash provides the Reconcile window, which contains the
 
3754
              balances of all your accounts. As a result, you don't have to
 
3755
              check the balances in various registers. Using this window, you
 
3756
              can easily validate bank statements.</para>
 
3757
            </listitem>
 
3758
 
 
3759
            <listitem>
 
3760
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Split Transactions:</emphasis> The
 
3761
              split transaction feature allows you to split a transaction into
 
3762
              multiple amounts and categories. For example, you purchase a few
 
3763
              things, which can be divided into different categories, from a
 
3764
              store. Here, the main transaction is the amount spent on the
 
3765
              purchase of these items, and the split transaction consists of
 
3766
              the entries of all the items on the split transaction editor
 
3767
              screen. You can re-check the main transaction at any time by
 
3768
              simply displaying the split transaction entries.</para>
 
3769
            </listitem>
 
3770
 
 
3771
            <listitem>
 
3772
              <para><emphasis role="strong">HBCI Support:</emphasis> GnuCash
 
3773
              also supports the German Home Banking Computer Information
 
3774
              (HBCI) protocol. This feature is useful for German users who
 
3775
              need not enter the details of their bank account manually. They
 
3776
              can directly perform online bank account transfers, download
 
3777
              bank statements and make direct debits.</para>
 
3778
            </listitem>
 
3779
 
 
3780
            <listitem>
 
3781
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Scheduled Transactions:</emphasis>
 
3782
              Users can schedule transactions in GnuCash as per their
 
3783
              requirements, and they can also set a reminder for the
 
3784
              transactions. This feature does not require you to remember
 
3785
              which transaction needs to run at what time. The software will
 
3786
              automatically keep track of the transaction and run the
 
3787
              transaction at the scheduled time. You can also re-schedule the
 
3788
              transactions, when required.</para>
 
3789
            </listitem>
 
3790
 
 
3791
            <listitem>
 
3792
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Transaction Finder:</emphasis> The
 
3793
              Transaction Finder dialogue box helps you locate even the
 
3794
              smallest transaction. You can enter the relevant fields in the
 
3795
              Transaction Finder window, and GnuCash will find the transaction
 
3796
              for you. For example, you want to identify all expenses above a
 
3797
              certain amount this month. GnuCash will be able to identify
 
3798
              these transactions. You need to mention the transaction as
 
3799
              greater than and the amount in the amount field.</para>
 
3800
            </listitem>
 
3801
 
 
3802
            <listitem>
 
3803
              <para><emphasis role="strong">New User Manual and
 
3804
              Help:</emphasis> GnuCash provides a new Tutorial and Concepts
 
3805
              guide to give an overview of the accounting principles to new
 
3806
              users. This helps the users apply the principles effectively and
 
3807
              gives them the exact procedure of each task.</para>
 
3808
            </listitem>
 
3809
          </itemizedlist></para>
 
3810
      </formalpara>
 
3811
    </sect2>
 
3812
 
 
3813
    <sect2>
 
3814
      <title>Scribus</title>
 
3815
 
 
3816
      <note userlevel="instructor">
 
3817
        <title>Instructor Notes:</title>
 
3818
 
 
3819
        <para>Quickly illustrate the sections on Scribus and Evince. Show
 
3820
        where they can be found and provide an overview.</para>
 
3821
      </note>
 
3822
 
 
3823
      <para>Scribus is a programme used to produce documents that cannot be
 
3824
      created easily with a word processor. For example, you will not be able
 
3825
      to use a word processor to create a poster or a greeting card as the
 
3826
      output will not be of professional print quality. Scribus enables easy
 
3827
      alignment of text and graphics, which is not a simple task using a word
 
3828
      processor. Scribus makes it easy to create PDF documents with
 
3829
      professional features for commercial purposes; design brochures,
 
3830
      newspapers, magazines, newsletters, posters and technical
 
3831
      documentation.</para>
 
3832
 
 
3833
      <formalpara>
 
3834
        <title>Key Features of Scribus</title>
 
3835
 
 
3836
        <para>Use Scribus to design documents that have a great deal of
 
3837
        graphical content. It is an application that allows the users to
 
3838
        position images, logos and so on at the appropriate place.
 
3839
        <itemizedlist>
 
3840
            <listitem>
 
3841
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Updatable page
 
3842
              templates:</emphasis> Scribus provides page templates that
 
3843
              contain common page properties, such as background, header and
 
3844
              footer.</para>
 
3845
            </listitem>
 
3846
 
 
3847
            <listitem>
 
3848
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Style manager:</emphasis> Choose
 
3849
              from a wide range of styling options, including style
 
3850
              inheritance for paragraphs, character styles and line styles.
 
3851
              The style manager gives you the advantage of viewing all the
 
3852
              styling options at one place and makes it easier to use the
 
3853
              appropriate styling option at the right place.</para>
 
3854
            </listitem>
 
3855
 
 
3856
            <listitem>
 
3857
              <para><emphasis role="strong">XML-based file format:</emphasis>
 
3858
              Scribus uses an XML-based file format that is fully
 
3859
              documented.</para>
 
3860
            </listitem>
 
3861
 
 
3862
            <listitem>
 
3863
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Font-handling features:</emphasis>
 
3864
              Scribus includes a vast range of features for handling fonts.
 
3865
              The features include rotating, flipping and scaling text. Both
 
3866
              Type1 and TrueType fonts are supported by Scribus, so you can
 
3867
              work on a document with any type of font.</para>
 
3868
            </listitem>
 
3869
 
 
3870
            <listitem>
 
3871
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Image-handling
 
3872
              features:</emphasis> Scribus imports most common image formats,
 
3873
              such as PNG, TIFF and JPEGs, so you can insert images of almost
 
3874
              all the common formats.</para>
 
3875
            </listitem>
 
3876
          </itemizedlist></para>
 
3877
      </formalpara>
 
3878
 
 
3879
      <para>In addition, Scribus supports: <itemizedlist>
 
3880
          <listitem>
 
3881
            <formalpara>
 
3882
              <title>Unicode text and fonts:</title>
 
3883
 
 
3884
              <para>Scribus imports most common text formats and supports
 
3885
              Unicode text and fonts. It also supports right-to-left scripts,
 
3886
              such as Arabic and Hebrew. This helps you open a document for
 
3887
              page layout, without worrying about which font it is written
 
3888
              in.</para>
 
3889
            </formalpara>
 
3890
          </listitem>
 
3891
 
 
3892
          <listitem>
 
3893
            <formalpara>
 
3894
              <title>Direct file imports:</title>
 
3895
 
 
3896
              <para>If you want to add pictures and graphs to your document,
 
3897
              you can use Draw, Impress and so on, and you can directly import
 
3898
              the file from that application to Scribus.</para>
 
3899
            </formalpara>
 
3900
          </listitem>
 
3901
 
 
3902
          <listitem>
 
3903
            <formalpara>
 
3904
              <title>CMYK:</title>
 
3905
 
 
3906
              <para>Scribus supports Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black (CMYK)
 
3907
              layering, which is most important for professional use. Printing
 
3908
              is done in the four CMYK layers. Because of the CMYK feature,
 
3909
              there will be minimal difference between the on-screen and final
 
3910
              printing. Scribus also provides enhanced colour management
 
3911
              functions.</para>
 
3912
            </formalpara>
 
3913
          </listitem>
 
3914
 
 
3915
          <listitem>
 
3916
            <formalpara>
 
3917
              <title>Functions related to PDF files:</title>
 
3918
 
 
3919
              <para>Even if your file is in PDF, you can export these files
 
3920
              easily to Scribus. You can also add effects to these files and
 
3921
              encrypt them. In addition, you can include keywords in an
 
3922
              exported PDF file.</para>
 
3923
            </formalpara>
 
3924
          </listitem>
 
3925
 
 
3926
          <listitem>
 
3927
            <formalpara>
 
3928
              <title>Vector formats:</title>
 
3929
 
 
3930
              <para>Scribus imports all the important vector formats,
 
3931
              including Adobe Illustrator (AI), Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
 
3932
              EPS and Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG), so that you can open any
 
3933
              vector graphic in Scribus effortlessly.</para>
 
3934
            </formalpara>
 
3935
          </listitem>
 
3936
        </itemizedlist></para>
 
3937
    </sect2>
 
3938
 
 
3939
    <sect2>
 
3940
      <title>Evince</title>
 
3941
 
 
3942
      <para>Evince is a document viewer in Ubuntu. It supports multiple
 
3943
      document formats, such as Portable Document Format (PDF), PostScript,
 
3944
      djvu, tiff and dvi. This viewer makes reading documents a simple and
 
3945
      hassle-free experience and has intuitive preview, index and search
 
3946
      capabilities. You can also view documents in full-screen or presentation
 
3947
      format, where each page is displayed like a slide in a slideshow.</para>
 
3948
 
 
3949
      <para>Because Evince can support multiple document formats, it can
 
3950
      replace the various document viewers that were used previously to view
 
3951
      the other document formats. Evince also supports multi-page
 
3952
      formats.</para>
 
3953
 
 
3954
      <para>The following screenshot shows the main interface of
 
3955
      Evince:</para>
 
3956
 
 
3957
      <figure float="0">
 
3958
        <title>Evince</title>
 
3959
 
 
3960
        <mediaobject>
 
3961
          <imageobject>
 
3962
            <imagedata fileref="images/Lesson05_images_101.png" format="PNG"
 
3963
                       width="14cm" />
 
3964
          </imageobject>
 
3965
        </mediaobject>
 
3966
      </figure>
 
3967
 
 
3968
      <formalpara>
 
3969
        <title>Key Features of Evince</title>
 
3970
 
 
3971
        <para>Some key features of Evince are described below: <itemizedlist>
 
3972
            <listitem>
 
3973
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Enhanced search
 
3974
              feature:</emphasis> Evince has an enhanced and integrated search
 
3975
              feature that displays the number of results found and highlights
 
3976
              the results on the page.</para>
 
3977
            </listitem>
 
3978
 
 
3979
            <listitem>
 
3980
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Thumbnails:</emphasis> Using this
 
3981
              feature, you need not go through each page; you can quickly
 
3982
              refer to the pages on the left sidebar of the window and click
 
3983
              any of the thumbnails to easily navigate to that page.</para>
 
3984
            </listitem>
 
3985
 
 
3986
            <listitem>
 
3987
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Indexing:</emphasis> In the
 
3988
              documents that support indexing, Evince allows easy navigation
 
3989
              by showing a document index. This index allows you to move from
 
3990
              one section to another.</para>
 
3991
            </listitem>
 
3992
 
 
3993
            <listitem>
 
3994
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Zoom:</emphasis> Evince allows you
 
3995
              to zoom in and zoom out of the document. In addition, Evince
 
3996
              remembers the zoom level of the document after closing it. The
 
3997
              next time you open the document, it opens at the same zoom
 
3998
              level.</para>
 
3999
            </listitem>
 
4000
 
 
4001
            <listitem>
 
4002
              <para><emphasis role="strong">Selection:</emphasis> Select the
 
4003
              text in a PDF document, which is not possible in all other
 
4004
              viewers.</para>
 
4005
            </listitem>
 
4006
          </itemizedlist></para>
 
4007
      </formalpara>
 
4008
    </sect2>
 
4009
  </sect1>
 
4010
 
 
4011
  <sect1 id="lesson5-summary">
 
4012
    <title>Lesson Summary</title>
 
4013
 
 
4014
    <para>In this lesson, you learned that:</para>
 
4015
 
 
4016
    <itemizedlist>
 
4017
      <listitem>
 
4018
        <para>OpenOffice.org is the default office application suite provided
 
4019
        with Ubuntu.</para>
 
4020
      </listitem>
 
4021
 
 
4022
      <listitem>
 
4023
        <para>The OpenOffice.org sofware suite comprises five applications to
 
4024
        help you handle your work effectively.</para>
 
4025
      </listitem>
 
4026
 
 
4027
      <listitem>
 
4028
        <para>Writer forms the word processor component of the OpenOffice.org
 
4029
        office software suite and contains all the features that you expect
 
4030
        from a modern, fully equipped word processor.</para>
 
4031
      </listitem>
 
4032
 
 
4033
      <listitem>
 
4034
        <para>Calc forms the spreadsheet component of the OpenOffice.org
 
4035
        office software suite and offers a whole range of advanced functions
 
4036
        to help accomplish complex tasks.</para>
 
4037
      </listitem>
 
4038
 
 
4039
      <listitem>
 
4040
        <para>Impress is a fully featured presentation tool included in the
 
4041
        OpenOffice.org office software suite.</para>
 
4042
      </listitem>
 
4043
 
 
4044
      <listitem>
 
4045
        <para>Math is the equation writer component of OpenOffice.org office
 
4046
        software suite.</para>
 
4047
      </listitem>
 
4048
 
 
4049
      <listitem>
 
4050
        <para>GnuCash is extremely useful application software for managing
 
4051
        your home and/or small business finances.</para>
 
4052
      </listitem>
 
4053
 
 
4054
      <listitem>
 
4055
        <para>Scribus is a page layout application that you can use to create
 
4056
        posters, cards, brochures and so on for commercial purposes.</para>
 
4057
      </listitem>
 
4058
 
 
4059
      <listitem>
 
4060
        <para>Evince is document viewer software that allows you to easily
 
4061
        navigate a document. The document can also be viewed or
 
4062
        searched.</para>
 
4063
      </listitem>
 
4064
    </itemizedlist>
 
4065
  </sect1>
 
4066
 
 
4067
  <sect1 role="questions">
 
4068
    <title>Review Exercise</title>
 
4069
 
 
4070
    <qandaset>
 
4071
      <qandaentry>
 
4072
        <question>
 
4073
          <para>List the applications included in the OpenOffice.org office
 
4074
          software suite.</para>
 
4075
        </question>
 
4076
 
 
4077
        <answer>
 
4078
          <para>The applications included in the OpenOffice.org office
 
4079
          software suite are: <itemizedlist>
 
4080
              <listitem>
 
4081
                <para>OpenOffice.org Writer</para>
 
4082
              </listitem>
 
4083
 
 
4084
              <listitem>
 
4085
                <para>OpenOffice.org Calc</para>
 
4086
              </listitem>
 
4087
 
 
4088
              <listitem>
 
4089
                <para>OpenOffice.org Impress</para>
 
4090
              </listitem>
 
4091
 
 
4092
              <listitem>
 
4093
                <para>OpenOffice.org Draw</para>
 
4094
              </listitem>
 
4095
 
 
4096
              <listitem>
 
4097
                <para>OpenOffice.org Base</para>
 
4098
              </listitem>
 
4099
 
 
4100
              <listitem>
 
4101
                <para>OpenOffice.org Math</para>
 
4102
              </listitem>
 
4103
            </itemizedlist></para>
 
4104
        </answer>
 
4105
      </qandaentry>
 
4106
 
 
4107
      <qandaentry>
 
4108
        <question>
 
4109
          <para>The applications in OpenOffice.org save files in which format,
 
4110
          by default?</para>
 
4111
 
 
4112
          <para>a) SWF</para>
 
4113
 
 
4114
          <para>b) PDF</para>
 
4115
 
 
4116
          <para>c) ODF</para>
 
4117
        </question>
 
4118
 
 
4119
        <answer>
 
4120
          <para>c) OpenDocument Format (ODF)</para>
 
4121
        </answer>
 
4122
      </qandaentry>
 
4123
 
 
4124
      <qandaentry>
 
4125
        <question>
 
4126
          <para>Name the equation editor component of the OpenOffice.org
 
4127
          software suite.</para>
 
4128
        </question>
 
4129
 
 
4130
        <answer>
 
4131
          <para>OpenOffice.org Math.</para>
 
4132
        </answer>
 
4133
      </qandaentry>
 
4134
 
 
4135
      <qandaentry>
 
4136
        <question>
 
4137
          <para>Which software feature help you create multiple personalised
 
4138
          form letters?</para>
 
4139
        </question>
 
4140
 
 
4141
        <answer>
 
4142
          <para>The Mail merge feature in Writer allows you to create multiple
 
4143
          personalised form letters, labels, envelopes, faxes, e-mail messages
 
4144
          by using a form letter template and an address database.</para>
 
4145
        </answer>
 
4146
      </qandaentry>
 
4147
 
 
4148
      <qandaentry>
 
4149
        <question>
 
4150
          <para>Which software feature in available OpenOffice.org helps you
 
4151
          navigate inside your document?</para>
 
4152
        </question>
 
4153
 
 
4154
        <answer>
 
4155
          <para>The Navigator feature available in OpenOffice.org provides you
 
4156
          an outline view of your entire document and allows you to quickly
 
4157
          navigate inside your document.</para>
 
4158
        </answer>
 
4159
      </qandaentry>
 
4160
 
 
4161
      <qandaentry>
 
4162
        <question>
 
4163
          <para>Name the feature in the Openoffice.org software suite that
 
4164
          allows you to perform a complete document makeover?</para>
 
4165
        </question>
 
4166
 
 
4167
        <answer>
 
4168
          <para>The Style and Formatting window.</para>
 
4169
        </answer>
 
4170
      </qandaentry>
 
4171
 
 
4172
      <qandaentry>
 
4173
        <question>
 
4174
          <para>Do you require any additional software to convert a
 
4175
          OpenOffice.org document into a PDF file?</para>
 
4176
        </question>
 
4177
 
 
4178
        <answer>
 
4179
          <para>The OpenOffice.org software suite allows you to save your
 
4180
          document directly as a Portable Document Format (PDF) file without
 
4181
          the use of any additional expensive software.</para>
 
4182
        </answer>
 
4183
      </qandaentry>
 
4184
 
 
4185
      <qandaentry>
 
4186
        <question>
 
4187
          <para>Name the software tool that guide you through the creation of
 
4188
          a formula in OpenOffice.org Calc.</para>
 
4189
        </question>
 
4190
 
 
4191
        <answer>
 
4192
          <para>The Function Wizard</para>
 
4193
        </answer>
 
4194
      </qandaentry>
 
4195
 
 
4196
      <qandaentry>
 
4197
        <question>
 
4198
          <para>Math allows you to type your formula directly into the
 
4199
          document if you are familiar with the_______________?</para>
 
4200
        </question>
 
4201
 
 
4202
        <answer>
 
4203
          <para>Math markup language</para>
 
4204
        </answer>
 
4205
      </qandaentry>
 
4206
 
 
4207
      <qandaentry>
 
4208
        <question>
 
4209
          <para>Name the feature available in OpenOffice.org Impress that
 
4210
          allows you to create text</para>
 
4211
 
 
4212
          <para>with stunning 3D effects?</para>
 
4213
        </question>
 
4214
 
 
4215
        <answer>
 
4216
          <para>The Fontwork Gallery</para>
 
4217
        </answer>
 
4218
      </qandaentry>
 
4219
 
 
4220
      <qandaentry>
 
4221
        <question>
 
4222
          <para>Which feature of GnuCash helps you look for a transaction
 
4223
          using a Query window?</para>
 
4224
 
 
4225
          <para>1. Split transaction</para>
 
4226
 
 
4227
          <para>2. Scheduled transaction</para>
 
4228
 
 
4229
          <para>3. Transaction finder</para>
 
4230
 
 
4231
          <para>4. Reconcile window</para>
 
4232
        </question>
 
4233
 
 
4234
        <answer>
 
4235
          <para>3. Transaction finder</para>
 
4236
        </answer>
 
4237
      </qandaentry>
 
4238
 
 
4239
      <qandaentry>
 
4240
        <question>
 
4241
          <para>What is Scribus?.</para>
 
4242
 
 
4243
          <para>a. An accounting application</para>
 
4244
 
 
4245
          <para>b. A word processor</para>
 
4246
 
 
4247
          <para>c. A document viewer</para>
 
4248
 
 
4249
          <para>d. Page layout software</para>
 
4250
        </question>
 
4251
 
 
4252
        <answer>
 
4253
          <para>d)Page layout software</para>
 
4254
        </answer>
 
4255
      </qandaentry>
 
4256
    </qandaset>
 
4257
  </sect1>
 
4258
 
 
4259
  <sect1>
 
4260
    <title>Lab Exercise</title>
 
4261
 
 
4262
    <formalpara>
 
4263
      <title>Exercise 1: Performing BasicWord Processing Tasks Using
 
4264
      Writer</title>
 
4265
 
 
4266
      <para>As an employee in an interior decorating company, you have been
 
4267
      asked to prepare an chapter on interior decoration that would feature in
 
4268
      the company's e-newlsetter. You have been quite upbeat about the
 
4269
      assignment as it would showcase your abilities to the fore. However, you
 
4270
      will have to prepare the chapter in the most aesthetically pleasing
 
4271
      manner as possible. You plan to include lots of text, equally supported
 
4272
      by some graphics and tables all aligned to live up to the highly
 
4273
      aesthetic sensibilities of the company employees.</para>
 
4274
    </formalpara>
 
4275
 
 
4276
    <para>To complete your assignment, you need to perform the following
 
4277
    tasks: <itemizedlist>
 
4278
        <listitem>
 
4279
          <para>Create and format a text document</para>
 
4280
        </listitem>
 
4281
 
 
4282
        <listitem>
 
4283
          <para>Insert tables in the document</para>
 
4284
        </listitem>
 
4285
 
 
4286
        <listitem>
 
4287
          <para>insert images in the document</para>
 
4288
        </listitem>
 
4289
 
 
4290
        <listitem>
 
4291
          <para>Save the document</para>
 
4292
        </listitem>
 
4293
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
4294
 
 
4295
    <procedure>
 
4296
      <title>To create and format a text document:</title>
 
4297
 
 
4298
      <step performance="required">
 
4299
        <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu,
 
4300
        point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
 
4301
        <emphasis role="strong">OpenOffice.org Word
 
4302
        Processor</emphasis>.</para>
 
4303
      </step>
 
4304
 
 
4305
      <step performance="required">
 
4306
        <para>Enter the required text in the blank document.</para>
 
4307
      </step>
 
4308
 
 
4309
      <step performance="required">
 
4310
        <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click
 
4311
        <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> to display the
 
4312
        <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> window.</para>
 
4313
      </step>
 
4314
 
 
4315
      <step performance="required">
 
4316
        <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis>
 
4317
        window, click a style category to reveal the various styles under that
 
4318
        category.</para>
 
4319
      </step>
 
4320
 
 
4321
      <step performance="required">
 
4322
        <para>Select the text on which you want to apply the style and
 
4323
        formatting.</para>
 
4324
      </step>
 
4325
 
 
4326
      <step performance="required">
 
4327
        <para>Double-click the desired style displayed in the <emphasis
 
4328
        role="strong">Style and Formatting</emphasis> window to apply it on
 
4329
        the selected text.</para>
 
4330
      </step>
 
4331
 
 
4332
      <step performance="required">
 
4333
        <para>Repeat the same procedure to apply different styles and
 
4334
        formatting for different components of the document.</para>
 
4335
 
 
4336
        <para>You have created and formatted your document according to your
 
4337
        requirements.</para>
 
4338
      </step>
 
4339
    </procedure>
 
4340
 
 
4341
    <procedure>
 
4342
      <title>To insert tables in the document:</title>
 
4343
 
 
4344
      <step performance="required">
 
4345
        <para>Position the cursor at the appropriate location in the document
 
4346
        where you want to insert the table.</para>
 
4347
      </step>
 
4348
 
 
4349
      <step performance="required">
 
4350
        <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Table</emphasis> menu, point to
 
4351
        <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> and then click <emphasis
 
4352
        role="strong">Table</emphasis></para>
 
4353
      </step>
 
4354
 
 
4355
      <step performance="required">
 
4356
        <para>Specify the table properties and click <emphasis
 
4357
        role="strong">OK</emphasis>.</para>
 
4358
      </step>
 
4359
 
 
4360
      <step performance="required">
 
4361
        <para>To display the <emphasis role="strong">Table Format</emphasis>
 
4362
        dialogue box, right-click the inserted table and select <emphasis
 
4363
        role="strong">Table</emphasis> from the short-cut menu.</para>
 
4364
      </step>
 
4365
 
 
4366
      <step performance="required">
 
4367
        <para>Define the table specifications per your requirements and
 
4368
        preferences in the <emphasis role="strong">Table Format</emphasis>
 
4369
        dialogue box and click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply
 
4370
        the changes.</para>
 
4371
 
 
4372
        <para>You have successfully inserted tables in your text document. You
 
4373
        can now populate the tables with the required data.</para>
 
4374
      </step>
 
4375
    </procedure>
 
4376
 
 
4377
    <procedure>
 
4378
      <title>To insert images in the document:</title>
 
4379
 
 
4380
      <step performance="required">
 
4381
        <para>Position the cursor at the appropriate location in the document
 
4382
        where you want the picture to be inserted.</para>
 
4383
      </step>
 
4384
 
 
4385
      <step performance="required">
 
4386
        <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, point to
 
4387
        <emphasis role="strong">Picture,</emphasis> then click <emphasis
 
4388
        role="strong">From File</emphasis>.</para>
 
4389
      </step>
 
4390
 
 
4391
      <step performance="required">
 
4392
        <para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Insert Picture</emphasis>
 
4393
        dialogue box, navigate to the desired file, select the file and then,
 
4394
        click <emphasis role="strong">Open.</emphasis></para>
 
4395
      </step>
 
4396
 
 
4397
      <step performance="required">
 
4398
        <para>To resize the inserted image, select the image, then press and
 
4399
        hold the <emphasis role="strong">SHIFT</emphasis> key.</para>
 
4400
      </step>
 
4401
 
 
4402
      <step performance="required">
 
4403
        <para>Holding down the <emphasis role="strong">SHIFT</emphasis> key,
 
4404
        click and drag one of the handles on the image to modify its
 
4405
        size.</para>
 
4406
      </step>
 
4407
 
 
4408
      <step performance="required">
 
4409
        <para>To arrange and align the image properly, right-click the image,
 
4410
        then select from the available options on the short-cut menu.</para>
 
4411
      </step>
 
4412
 
 
4413
      <step performance="required">
 
4414
        <para>Define the appropriate positioning options for the image.</para>
 
4415
      </step>
 
4416
 
 
4417
      <step performance="required">
 
4418
        <para>The image is now inserted properly into your text
 
4419
        document.</para>
 
4420
      </step>
 
4421
    </procedure>
 
4422
 
 
4423
    <procedure>
 
4424
      <title>To save the document:</title>
 
4425
 
 
4426
      <step performance="required">
 
4427
        <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu click
 
4428
        <emphasis role="strong">Save As</emphasis>.</para>
 
4429
      </step>
 
4430
 
 
4431
      <step performance="required">
 
4432
        <para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Save</emphasis> dialogue box,
 
4433
        Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file.</para>
 
4434
      </step>
 
4435
 
 
4436
      <step performance="required">
 
4437
        <para>Enter the file name in the <emphasis
 
4438
        role="strong">Name</emphasis> field.</para>
 
4439
      </step>
 
4440
 
 
4441
      <step performance="required">
 
4442
        <para>Specify the file type by selecting from the drop-down menu at
 
4443
        the bottom of the dialogue box.</para>
 
4444
      </step>
 
4445
 
 
4446
      <step performance="required">
 
4447
        <para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Save</emphasis> to save the
 
4448
        file.</para>
 
4449
 
 
4450
        <para>You have successfully saved your document at the desired
 
4451
        location.</para>
 
4452
      </step>
 
4453
    </procedure>
 
4454
 
 
4455
    <formalpara>
 
4456
      <title>Exercise 2: Performing Basic Spreadsheet Tasks Using Calc</title>
 
4457
 
 
4458
      <para>As the accounts manager for your company, you are assigned with
 
4459
      the task of preparing the quarterly accounts report for the company. You
 
4460
      have been suddenly burdened with the task of collating a huge amount of
 
4461
      data, analyzing the data to derive the required reports, present the
 
4462
      data before the management and generate the reports in PDF format for
 
4463
      documentation and future reference. In order to accomplish this feat,
 
4464
      you shall have to perform the following tasks: <itemizedlist>
 
4465
          <listitem>
 
4466
            <para>Entering and format the data in a spreadsheet</para>
 
4467
          </listitem>
 
4468
 
 
4469
          <listitem>
 
4470
            <para>Apply formulas and functions on the data</para>
 
4471
          </listitem>
 
4472
 
 
4473
          <listitem>
 
4474
            <para>Present the data graphically</para>
 
4475
          </listitem>
 
4476
 
 
4477
          <listitem>
 
4478
            <para>Generate the report in PDF format</para>
 
4479
          </listitem>
 
4480
        </itemizedlist></para>
 
4481
    </formalpara>
 
4482
 
 
4483
    <para>To enter and format the data in a spreadsheet: <itemizedlist>
 
4484
        <listitem>
 
4485
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu,
 
4486
          point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
 
4487
          <emphasis role="strong">OpenOffice.org Spreadsheet</emphasis> to
 
4488
          open a Calc spreadsheet.</para>
 
4489
        </listitem>
 
4490
 
 
4491
        <listitem>
 
4492
          <para>Enter the required data in the spreadsheet.</para>
 
4493
        </listitem>
 
4494
 
 
4495
        <listitem>
 
4496
          <para>To apply desired formatting to a selected range of cells, on
 
4497
          the <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis
 
4498
          role="strong">Cells.</emphasis></para>
 
4499
        </listitem>
 
4500
 
 
4501
        <listitem>
 
4502
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Format Cells</emphasis> dialogue
 
4503
          box is displayed. Use the various options available under the
 
4504
          <emphasis role="strong">Font, Font Effects</emphasis> and <emphasis
 
4505
          role="strong">Alignment</emphasis> tabs to specify various
 
4506
          formatting attributes for the selected text.</para>
 
4507
        </listitem>
 
4508
 
 
4509
        <listitem>
 
4510
          <para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Ok</emphasis> to apply the
 
4511
          formatting effects.</para>
 
4512
        </listitem>
 
4513
 
 
4514
        <listitem>
 
4515
          <para>To apply Autoformat to a sheet or selected cell range, on the
 
4516
          <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis
 
4517
          role="strong">Autoformat.</emphasis></para>
 
4518
        </listitem>
 
4519
 
 
4520
        <listitem>
 
4521
          <para>To assign a preset format to the selected cells, select one
 
4522
          from the <emphasis role="strong">Format</emphasis> list and then
 
4523
          click <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the selected
 
4524
          format on the selection.</para>
 
4525
 
 
4526
          <para>You have successfully entered your data in a spreadsheet and
 
4527
          applied the desired formatting to it.</para>
 
4528
        </listitem>
 
4529
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
4530
 
 
4531
    <para>To apply formulas and functions on the data: <itemizedlist>
 
4532
        <listitem>
 
4533
          <para>Select the cell in your spreadsheet where you want the formula
 
4534
          to be inserted.</para>
 
4535
        </listitem>
 
4536
 
 
4537
        <listitem>
 
4538
          <para>To create and apply a formula or function with the help of
 
4539
          <emphasis role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis>, click <emphasis
 
4540
          role="strong">Function Wizard</emphasis> on the <emphasis
 
4541
          role="strong">Formula Bar</emphasis>.</para>
 
4542
        </listitem>
 
4543
 
 
4544
        <listitem>
 
4545
          <para>Select the desired function category from the <emphasis
 
4546
          role="strong">Category</emphasis> drop-down list to display the
 
4547
          functions listed under that specific category.</para>
 
4548
        </listitem>
 
4549
 
 
4550
        <listitem>
 
4551
          <para>Find the desired function from the <emphasis
 
4552
          role="strong">Functions</emphasis> list and click it once to select
 
4553
          it.</para>
 
4554
        </listitem>
 
4555
 
 
4556
        <listitem>
 
4557
          <para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Next</emphasis> to proceed with
 
4558
          the task of entering a formula.</para>
 
4559
        </listitem>
 
4560
 
 
4561
        <listitem>
 
4562
          <para>To specify the cell range on which you want to apply the
 
4563
          formula, click the <emphasis role="strong">Shrink</emphasis> button.
 
4564
          This shrinks the <emphasis role="strong">FunctionWizard</emphasis>
 
4565
          dialogue box and you are returned to the main spreadsheet
 
4566
          window.</para>
 
4567
        </listitem>
 
4568
 
 
4569
        <listitem>
 
4570
          <para>Select the cell range containing the desired data.</para>
 
4571
        </listitem>
 
4572
 
 
4573
        <listitem>
 
4574
          <para>After selecting the cells, go back to the Function Wizard by
 
4575
          clicking the <emphasis role="strong">Maximize</emphasis>
 
4576
          button.</para>
 
4577
        </listitem>
 
4578
 
 
4579
        <listitem>
 
4580
          <para>To complete the task of entering a formula, click <emphasis
 
4581
          role="strong">OK.</emphasis></para>
 
4582
 
 
4583
          <para>You have successfully applied a formula on the data. The
 
4584
          solution appears in the cell where you had applied the
 
4585
          formula.</para>
 
4586
        </listitem>
 
4587
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
4588
 
 
4589
    <para>To present your data graphically:</para>
 
4590
 
 
4591
    <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, select
 
4592
    <emphasis role="strong">Chart.</emphasis> <itemizedlist>
 
4593
        <listitem>
 
4594
          <para>Define the data range, the labels and the target sheet where
 
4595
          the chart would be displayed</para>
 
4596
        </listitem>
 
4597
 
 
4598
        <listitem>
 
4599
          <para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Next</emphasis> to
 
4600
          continue.</para>
 
4601
        </listitem>
 
4602
 
 
4603
        <listitem>
 
4604
          <para>Select the chart type and click <emphasis
 
4605
          role="strong">Next</emphasis> to continue with the procedure of
 
4606
          inserting charts.</para>
 
4607
        </listitem>
 
4608
 
 
4609
        <listitem>
 
4610
          <para>Specify a variant for the selected graph type and click
 
4611
          <emphasis role="strong">Next</emphasis> to continue</para>
 
4612
        </listitem>
 
4613
 
 
4614
        <listitem>
 
4615
          <para>Specify the main title for your chart and title and labels for
 
4616
          the axes. After specifying the required information, click <emphasis
 
4617
          role="strong">Create.</emphasis></para>
 
4618
        </listitem>
 
4619
 
 
4620
        <listitem>
 
4621
          <para>A chart is inserted at the specified location in your
 
4622
          spreadsheet. You have successfully displayed your data in the form
 
4623
          of a chart.</para>
 
4624
        </listitem>
 
4625
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
4626
 
 
4627
    <para>To generate a PDF file of the report: <itemizedlist>
 
4628
        <listitem>
 
4629
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
 
4630
          <emphasis role="strong">Export as PDF</emphasis>.</para>
 
4631
        </listitem>
 
4632
 
 
4633
        <listitem>
 
4634
          <para>Enter a file name in the <emphasis
 
4635
          role="strong">Name</emphasis> field on the <emphasis
 
4636
          role="strong">Export</emphasis> dialogue box</para>
 
4637
        </listitem>
 
4638
 
 
4639
        <listitem>
 
4640
          <para>Navigate to the directory where you want to save the
 
4641
          file.</para>
 
4642
        </listitem>
 
4643
 
 
4644
        <listitem>
 
4645
          <para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Save</emphasis> to
 
4646
          continue.</para>
 
4647
        </listitem>
 
4648
 
 
4649
        <listitem>
 
4650
          <para>Define the desired options on the <emphasis role="strong">PDF
 
4651
          Options</emphasis> dialogue box, then click <emphasis
 
4652
          role="strong">OK.</emphasis></para>
 
4653
 
 
4654
          <para>You have successfully exported your spreadsheet as a PDF
 
4655
          file.</para>
 
4656
        </listitem>
 
4657
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
4658
 
 
4659
    <formalpara>
 
4660
      <title>Exercise 3: Creating Multimedia Presentation Using
 
4661
      Impress</title>
 
4662
 
 
4663
      <para>In your job profile as a trainer in an architecture firm, you are
 
4664
      required to develop a presentation on architectural designs and plans,
 
4665
      which shall be used as training material for the new joins. You want
 
4666
      your training material to effectively demonstrate all the dimensional
 
4667
      details of your architectural designs, which may include floor plans,
 
4668
      elevations and siteplans. You would also like to infuse some life into
 
4669
      your presentation by adding animations wherever required. Finally, you
 
4670
      want to convert the presentation into a Flash file for easy future
 
4671
      reference.</para>
 
4672
    </formalpara>
 
4673
 
 
4674
    <para>To accomplish the task, you will need to: <itemizedlist>
 
4675
        <listitem>
 
4676
          <para>Create a presentation with the required text and images</para>
 
4677
        </listitem>
 
4678
 
 
4679
        <listitem>
 
4680
          <para>Add 3D graphics and animations in the presentation</para>
 
4681
        </listitem>
 
4682
 
 
4683
        <listitem>
 
4684
          <para>Configure and perform a slide show</para>
 
4685
        </listitem>
 
4686
 
 
4687
        <listitem>
 
4688
          <para>Export the presentation as a Flash file</para>
 
4689
        </listitem>
 
4690
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
4691
 
 
4692
    <para>To create a presentation with the required text and images:
 
4693
    <itemizedlist>
 
4694
        <listitem>
 
4695
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Applications</emphasis> menu,
 
4696
          point to <emphasis role="strong">Office</emphasis> and then click
 
4697
          <emphasis role="strong">OpenOffice.org
 
4698
          Presentation</emphasis>.</para>
 
4699
        </listitem>
 
4700
 
 
4701
        <listitem>
 
4702
          <para>The <emphasis role="strong">Presentation Wizard</emphasis>
 
4703
          dialogue box appears. To create a new blank presentation, retain the
 
4704
          default selection and click <emphasis
 
4705
          role="strong">Next.</emphasis></para>
 
4706
        </listitem>
 
4707
 
 
4708
        <listitem>
 
4709
          <para>Select the slide design and output medium for the presentation
 
4710
          and click <emphasis role="strong">Next.</emphasis></para>
 
4711
        </listitem>
 
4712
 
 
4713
        <listitem>
 
4714
          <para>Define the transition effect to be applied on the slides and
 
4715
          click <emphasis role="strong">Create</emphasis> to proceed.</para>
 
4716
        </listitem>
 
4717
 
 
4718
        <listitem>
 
4719
          <para>Select a layout for your current slide from the <emphasis
 
4720
          role="strong">Task</emphasis> pane on the left.</para>
 
4721
        </listitem>
 
4722
 
 
4723
        <listitem>
 
4724
          <para>Enter the required text in the provided textboxes to create
 
4725
          the first slide, then click <emphasis role="strong">Master
 
4726
          Pages</emphasis> to open the <emphasis role="strong">Master
 
4727
          Pages</emphasis> panel.</para>
 
4728
        </listitem>
 
4729
 
 
4730
        <listitem>
 
4731
          <para>Click once on the template of your choice to apply it to your
 
4732
          presentation.</para>
 
4733
        </listitem>
 
4734
 
 
4735
        <listitem>
 
4736
          <para>Insert a new slide by clicking the <emphasis
 
4737
          role="strong">Slide</emphasis> button on the <emphasis
 
4738
          role="strong">Standard toolbar</emphasis>.</para>
 
4739
        </listitem>
 
4740
 
 
4741
        <listitem>
 
4742
          <para>Select a layout for the new slide.</para>
 
4743
        </listitem>
 
4744
 
 
4745
        <listitem>
 
4746
          <para>Enter the required text in the provided text box.</para>
 
4747
        </listitem>
 
4748
 
 
4749
        <listitem>
 
4750
          <para>To insert a picture in the presentation, on the <emphasis
 
4751
          role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, click <emphasis
 
4752
          role="strong">Picture.</emphasis></para>
 
4753
        </listitem>
 
4754
 
 
4755
        <listitem>
 
4756
          <para>In the <emphasis role="strong">Insert Picture</emphasis>
 
4757
          dialogue box, select the desired image and click <emphasis
 
4758
          role="strong">Open</emphasis> to insert it.</para>
 
4759
        </listitem>
 
4760
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
4761
 
 
4762
    <para>Follow the same procedure to create the rest of the slides.</para>
 
4763
 
 
4764
    <para>You have successfully created a presentation with the required text
 
4765
    and images.</para>
 
4766
 
 
4767
    <para>To add 3D graphics and animations: <itemizedlist>
 
4768
        <listitem>
 
4769
          <para>To render special 3D effects to a piece of text, on the
 
4770
          <emphasis role="strong">Drawing</emphasis> toolbar, click the
 
4771
          <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork Gallery</emphasis> button.</para>
 
4772
        </listitem>
 
4773
 
 
4774
        <listitem>
 
4775
          <para>Select the style in which you want the text to be displayed
 
4776
          and click <emphasis role="strong">OK.</emphasis></para>
 
4777
        </listitem>
 
4778
 
 
4779
        <listitem>
 
4780
          <para>Double-click the <emphasis role="strong">Fontwork</emphasis>
 
4781
          object.</para>
 
4782
        </listitem>
 
4783
 
 
4784
        <listitem>
 
4785
          <para>Type the required text in place of the black ' <emphasis
 
4786
          role="strong">Fontwork'</emphasis> that appears over the
 
4787
          object.</para>
 
4788
        </listitem>
 
4789
 
 
4790
        <listitem>
 
4791
          <para>Click once outside the object's selected area to exit the
 
4792
          Fontwork edit mode.</para>
 
4793
        </listitem>
 
4794
 
 
4795
        <listitem>
 
4796
          <para>To display the <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects</emphasis>
 
4797
          toolbar, on the <emphasis role="strong">View</emphasis> menu, point
 
4798
          to <emphasis role="strong">Toolbars</emphasis> and then select
 
4799
          <emphasis role="strong">3D-Objects</emphasis>.</para>
 
4800
        </listitem>
 
4801
 
 
4802
        <listitem>
 
4803
          <para>To insert a <emphasis role="strong">3D-Object</emphasis> in
 
4804
          your current slide, click the desired object on the 3D-Objects
 
4805
          toolbar.</para>
 
4806
        </listitem>
 
4807
 
 
4808
        <listitem>
 
4809
          <para>Then move your mouse to the point where you want to insert the
 
4810
          object.</para>
 
4811
        </listitem>
 
4812
 
 
4813
        <listitem>
 
4814
          <para>Holing down the left mouse button drag the mouse to insert the
 
4815
          object on the slide.</para>
 
4816
        </listitem>
 
4817
 
 
4818
        <listitem>
 
4819
          <para>Change the proportion and size of the object by holding down
 
4820
          the green handles.</para>
 
4821
        </listitem>
 
4822
 
 
4823
        <listitem>
 
4824
          <para>To apply 3D effects on the inserted graphic, right-click the
 
4825
          object. On the short-cut menu, click <emphasis role="strong">3D
 
4826
          Effects</emphasis>.</para>
 
4827
        </listitem>
 
4828
 
 
4829
        <listitem>
 
4830
          <para>Define the look and feel of the inserted object by selecting
 
4831
          appropriate options in the <emphasis role="strong">3D
 
4832
          Effects</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
 
4833
        </listitem>
 
4834
 
 
4835
        <listitem>
 
4836
          <para>After defining the options, click the <emphasis
 
4837
          role="strong">Assign</emphasis> icon on top right of the <emphasis
 
4838
          role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
 
4839
        </listitem>
 
4840
 
 
4841
        <listitem>
 
4842
          <para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Close</emphasis> to exit the
 
4843
          <emphasis role="strong">3D Effects</emphasis> dialogue box.</para>
 
4844
        </listitem>
 
4845
 
 
4846
        <listitem>
 
4847
          <para>To add animations, to the various elements in your
 
4848
          presentation, on the <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis>
 
4849
          menu, click <emphasis role="strong">Custom
 
4850
          Animation</emphasis>.</para>
 
4851
        </listitem>
 
4852
 
 
4853
        <listitem>
 
4854
          <para>Select an element and click the <emphasis
 
4855
          role="strong">Add</emphasis> button on the <emphasis
 
4856
          role="strong">Custom Animation</emphasis> panel to display the
 
4857
          <emphasis role="strong">Custom Animation</emphasis> dialogue
 
4858
          box.</para>
 
4859
        </listitem>
 
4860
 
 
4861
        <listitem>
 
4862
          <para>After defining all the desired settings for the object, click
 
4863
          <emphasis role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the animation
 
4864
          effects.</para>
 
4865
        </listitem>
 
4866
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
4867
 
 
4868
    <para>Your have successfully added 3D graphics and animations in your
 
4869
    presentation. <itemizedlist>
 
4870
        <listitem>
 
4871
          <para>To configure and perform a slide show:</para>
 
4872
        </listitem>
 
4873
 
 
4874
        <listitem>
 
4875
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> menu,
 
4876
          select <emphasis role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis>
 
4877
          Settings.</para>
 
4878
        </listitem>
 
4879
 
 
4880
        <listitem>
 
4881
          <para>Select the desired options on the <emphasis
 
4882
          role="strong">Slide Show</emphasis> dialogue box and click <emphasis
 
4883
          role="strong">OK</emphasis> to apply the settings.</para>
 
4884
        </listitem>
 
4885
 
 
4886
        <listitem>
 
4887
          <para>To start the slide show, select <emphasis role="strong">Slide
 
4888
          Show</emphasis> from the Slide Show menu or press <emphasis
 
4889
          role="strong">F5</emphasis>.</para>
 
4890
 
 
4891
          <para>Your presentation runs as a lively slide show.</para>
 
4892
        </listitem>
 
4893
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
4894
 
 
4895
    <para>To export the presentation as a Flash file: <itemizedlist>
 
4896
        <listitem>
 
4897
          <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> menu, click
 
4898
          <emphasis role="strong">Export.</emphasis></para>
 
4899
        </listitem>
 
4900
 
 
4901
        <listitem>
 
4902
          <para>Specify a file name in the <emphasis
 
4903
          role="strong">File</emphasis> name field and navigate to the
 
4904
          directory where you want to export the file.</para>
 
4905
        </listitem>
 
4906
 
 
4907
        <listitem>
 
4908
          <para>To export the presentation as a <emphasis
 
4909
          role="strong">Flash</emphasis> file, select <emphasis
 
4910
          role="strong">Macromedia Flash (SWF) (.swf)</emphasis> from the
 
4911
          <emphasis role="strong">File</emphasis> format drop-down
 
4912
          list.</para>
 
4913
        </listitem>
 
4914
 
 
4915
        <listitem>
 
4916
          <para>Click <emphasis role="strong">Save</emphasis> to export the
 
4917
          file at the desired location.</para>
 
4918
        </listitem>
 
4919
      </itemizedlist></para>
 
4920
 
 
4921
    <para>The file is exported at the indicated location. You can now view the
 
4922
    presentation as an SWF file.</para>
 
4923
 
 
4924
    <formalpara>
 
4925
      <title>Exercise 4: Creating Formulae Using Math</title>
 
4926
 
 
4927
      <para>In your role as a high school mathematics teacher, you need to
 
4928
      create a mathematics test paper that also contains geometrical and
 
4929
      arithmetical equations. You have to find a way to display the
 
4930
      mathematical equations properly in the text document.</para>
 
4931
    </formalpara>
 
4932
 
 
4933
    <formalpara>
 
4934
      <title>Solution:</title>
 
4935
 
 
4936
      <para><itemizedlist>
 
4937
          <listitem>
 
4938
            <para>Position the cursor on the document where you want to insert
 
4939
            the formula.</para>
 
4940
          </listitem>
 
4941
 
 
4942
          <listitem>
 
4943
            <para>On the <emphasis role="strong">Insert</emphasis> menu, point
 
4944
            to <emphasis role="strong">Object</emphasis> and then click
 
4945
            <emphasis role="strong">Formula.</emphasis> The <emphasis
 
4946
            role="strong">Equation editor</emphasis> appears at the bottom of
 
4947
            the document window.</para>
 
4948
          </listitem>
 
4949
 
 
4950
          <listitem>
 
4951
            <para>To display the <emphasis role="strong">Selection</emphasis>
 
4952
            window, on the <emphasis role="strong">View</emphasis> menu, click
 
4953
            <emphasis role="strong">Selection.</emphasis></para>
 
4954
          </listitem>
 
4955
 
 
4956
          <listitem>
 
4957
            <para>Start inserting the formula by selecting a symbol from the
 
4958
            <emphasis role="strong"> Selection</emphasis> window.</para>
 
4959
          </listitem>
 
4960
 
 
4961
          <listitem>
 
4962
            <para>Enter the required text in the placeholders that appear in
 
4963
            the equation editor.</para>
 
4964
          </listitem>
 
4965
 
 
4966
          <listitem>
 
4967
            <para>Follow the same procedure to enter the rest of the
 
4968
            equation.</para>
 
4969
          </listitem>
 
4970
 
 
4971
          <listitem>
 
4972
            <para>Click anywhere on the document body to exit the equation
 
4973
            editor.</para>
 
4974
          </listitem>
 
4975
 
 
4976
          <listitem>
 
4977
            <para>To insert some formulas containing Greek characters, display
 
4978
            the <emphasis role="strong">Catalog</emphasis> window by selecting
 
4979
            it from the <emphasis role="strong">Tools</emphasis> menu.</para>
 
4980
          </listitem>
 
4981
 
 
4982
          <listitem>
 
4983
            <para>Ensure that <emphasis role="strong">Greek</emphasis> is
 
4984
            selected under the <emphasis role="strong">Symbol</emphasis> set
 
4985
            drop-down window.</para>
 
4986
          </listitem>
 
4987
 
 
4988
          <listitem>
 
4989
            <para>Select the required Greek symbol from the <emphasis
 
4990
            role="strong">Symbols</emphasis> window and click <emphasis
 
4991
            role="strong">Insert.</emphasis></para>
 
4992
          </listitem>
 
4993
 
 
4994
          <listitem>
 
4995
            <para>Follow the same procedure to enter the rest of the
 
4996
            formula.</para>
 
4997
          </listitem>
 
4998
        </itemizedlist></para>
 
4999
    </formalpara>
 
5000
  </sect1>
 
5001
</chapter>
 
 
b'\\ No newline at end of file'